Chrysler | Dodge Charger 2013 | Owner`s manual | Chrysler Dodge Charger 2013 Owner`s manual

2013 charger
2013
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
13D481-126-AA
First Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
charger
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional
on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description
of features and equipment that are no longer available or
were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any
features and equipment described in this manual that are
not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously
manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2012 Chrysler Group LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
1
4 INTRODUCTION
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techCongratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
nicians and genuine MOPAR威 parts, and cares about
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
your satisfaction.
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
this Owner’s Manual:
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible
VIN Location
from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also located
number also appears on the Automobile Information on the right front strut tower inside the engine compartDisclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the ment.
vehicle registration, and the title.
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 SENTRY KEY威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . .
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . .
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ To Unlock The Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . .18
. . . . . .18
. . . . . .18
. . . . . .19
. . . . . .20
. . . . . .20
. . . . . .21
. . . . . .22
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters. . . . . . . .24
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .24 䡵 TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 䡵 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM —
䡵 Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . .
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . .
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
. .45
. .45
. .49
. .54
. .55
. .55
. .56
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .95
(BeltAlert威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .58
▫ Transporting Passengers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
▫ Supplemental Restraint System
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
(SRS) — Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . .65
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Make Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
2
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start
transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN).
RUN will illuminate.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
feature, (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in ⬙Things To have a low or dead battery. In this situation a back up
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further informa- method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put
tion).
the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
Key Fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
push to operate the ignition switch.
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger
compartment.
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Key Fob
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
The emergency key is also for locking the glove box. You
can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch Ignition Or Accessory On Message
on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or
and then pull the key out with your other hand.
ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime,
the ignition or accessory on message will display in the
cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect威 system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect威 Settings”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Emergency Key Removal
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the Key Fob from vehicle, cycle the ignition
OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
SENTRY KEY姞
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) and a
RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
After cycling the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
CAUTION!
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system is not compatindicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In ible with some after-market remote starting systems.
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start problems and loss of security protection.
the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
engine being shut off after two seconds.
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 Replacement Keys
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electron- NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
ics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
as possible by an authorized dealer.
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
CAUTION!
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
position.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
General Information
The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules Part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
To Arm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter-N-Go™
Start/Stop button for unauthorized operation. While the
Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior switches for
door locks and decklid release are disabled. If something
triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the following audible and visible signals: the horn
will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash,
and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
will flash.
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
Rearming Of The System
1. Remove the key from the ignition system (refer to
⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for
further information).
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
make sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF⬙.
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
make sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF⬙ and the
key is physically removed from the ignition.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn • Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
off after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off with the driver and/or passenger door open.
after 15 additional minutes, and then the Vehicle Security
• Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
Alarm will rearm itself.
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the same
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in ⬙Things • Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position.
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further information).
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ,
press the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Start/Stop button
• Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).
(RKE) transmitter.
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N3. If any doors are open, close them.
Go™ , insert a valid key into the ignition switch and
turn the key to the ON position.
To Disarm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of NOTE:
the following methods:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on
• Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Security Alarm.
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if • When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ⬙ in ⬙Things
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
information).
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Tamper Alert
Security System Manual Override
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is
exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the cycled to the ON/RUN position from the OFF position.
Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above
disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit• The front courtesy overhead console and door courter buttons for all RKE transmitters.
tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the
“Dome ON” position (extreme top position).
NOTE:
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held
Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does
not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
Key Fob With RKE Transmitter
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock The Doors
Flash Lights With Lock
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal
lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The
illuminated entry system will also turn on.
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, refer to “Uconnect威 Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ” under “Things To Know Before Turn Headlights On With Remote Key Unlock
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors 1st
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
Press
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either equipped through Uconnect威 . To change the current
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the setting, refer to “Uconnect威 Settings” in “Understanding
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
current setting, refer to “Uconnect威 Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ” under “Things To Know Before
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitStarting Your Vehicle” for further information.
ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
Using The Panic Alarm
To Lock The Doors
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights will turn on, the park lights will flash, the
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors turn on.
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
refer to “Uconnect威 Settings” in “Understanding Your you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph
Instrument Panel” for further information.
(24 km/h) or greater.
To Unlatch The Trunk
Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two
times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk.
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
NOTE:
• The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition • Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the
Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
and horn will remain on.
housing or the printed circuit board.
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your
by the system.
other hand.
Programming Additional Transmitters
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
performed at an authorized dealer.
of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage
the seal during removal.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
Emergency Key Removal
• This device must accept any interference received,
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
including interference that may cause undesired op(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
eration.
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly apon the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery proved by the party responsible for compliance could
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal NOTE:
distance, check for these two conditions:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected
life of the battery is a minimum of three years.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may
reduce this range.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
How To Use Remote Start
radios.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
engine will remote start:
• Shift lever in PARK
This system uses the Key Fob with Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the • Doors closed
engine conveniently from outside the vehicle • Hood closed
while still maintaining security. The system has
• Trunk closed
a range of approximately 300 ft (91 m).
• HAZARD switch off
• BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• RKE PANIC button not pressed
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
• System not disabled from previous remote start event vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
• Vehicle theft alarm not active
• Ignition in OFF position
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is cycled
to the ON/RUN position.
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before
Press and release the REMOTE START button
you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if Vehicle
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute
allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
NOTE:
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds. Start request.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Cancel Remote Start
Before the end of 15 minute cycle, press and release the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,
press and release the START/STOP button.
Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following
occur:
• The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm
• Any engine warning lights come on
NOTE: The message “Push Start Button” will display in • Low Fuel Light turns on
the EVIC until you push the START button.
• The hood is opened
• The hazard switch is pressed
• The shift lever is moved out of PARK
• The brake pedal is pressed
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door
trim panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel
upward.
Door Lock Knob
If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
(Continued)
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry) system. For further
information, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ” in “Things
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
Power Door Locks
If you press the power door lock switch while the
ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any
front door is open, the power locks will not operate. This
prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in
the vehicle. Cycling the ignition to the OFF position or
closing the door will allow the locks to operate. If a door
is open, and the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN
position, a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the
Key Fob.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
Power Door Lock Switch
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
authorized dealer. Please see your authorized dealer for To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect威 Setservice.
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
power door locks if:
in accordance with local laws.
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en- Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors
abled.
2. The vehicle was in motion, then speed returned to To provide a safer environment for small children riding
0 mph (0 km/h) and the transmission shift lever is in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
placed in NEUTRAL.
3. The driver door is opened.
4. The doors were not previously unlocked.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and
rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged, • If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
move the lock knob up (unlocked position), roll down the
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower rewindow and open the door with the outside door handle.
sponse time.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
• If the vehicle is unlocked by the RKE transmitter or
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
Passive Entry and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds,
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
the vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm the
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you
theft alarm.
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
“Uconnect威 Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
2
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver door handle, grab the front driver
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front
driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
“Uconnect威 Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE To Enter The Trunk
Transmitter In Vehicle
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a (1.5 m) of the deck lid, press the button on the right side
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the of CHMSL, (Center High Mounted Stop Light) which is
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door located on the deck lid.
unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch
is in the OFF position
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically
unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times
(on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive
Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
CHMSL Button
2
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive
Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the
deck lid, the deck lid will automatically unlatch, unless
another one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is outside the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
deck lid.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handles, press the door handle LOCK button to lock both
doors.
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pressing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
Press The Door Handle Button To Lock
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
NOTE:
• After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
Do NOT Grab The handle When Locking
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
2
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
Power Windows
The window controls will operate only when the ignition
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
door windows.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect威, the
power window switches will remain active for up to 10
minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The
time is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect威 Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WINDOWS
Power Window Switches
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and do not
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by
the windows while operating the power window
switches. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
AUTO-Down Feature
To open the window part way, press the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
AUTO operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
The driver door power window switch and some model the first detent and release it when you want the window
passenger door power window switches have an AUTO- to stop.
down feature. Press the window switch to the second
detent, release, and the window will go down automatically.
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Reset Auto-Up
• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto- Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window 1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
switch again to close the window.
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto- 2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
detent to open the window completely and continue
first detent and hold to close the window manually.
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
after the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on the
rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls,
press and release the window lockout button (setting it in
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
the DOWN position). To enable the window controls, Wind Buffeting
press and release the window lockout button again Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
(setting it in the UP position).
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
Window Lockout Switch
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by
pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the With the ignition in the OFF position or the key removed
button will operate.
from the ignition switch, the Trunk Open symbol will
display until the trunk is closed.
The trunk lid can be released from
outside the vehicle by pressing the
TRUNK button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
twice within five seconds.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for more information on
trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature.
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
WARNING!
Trunk Release
Button
With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the Trunk
Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster
indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display
will reappear once the trunk is closed.
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
Trunk Emergency Release
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency Release Some of the most important safety features in your
lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the vehicle are the restraint systems:
event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and
trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the glow-in-theall passengers
dark handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism.
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front
passenger
• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
for the driver and passengers seated next to a window
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
Trunk Emergency Internal Release
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
rates of inflation based on several factors, including the
energy during an impact event
severity and type of collision.
• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large
buckled up in a rear seat.
item in a seat — if equipped
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren (LATCH).
WARNING!
Infants in rear facing child restraints should never
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can
cause severe injury or death to infants in that position.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt- 4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
between you and the door.
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
their arm.
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
WARNING!
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
(Continued)
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and/or Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bag (SAB) during deployment could cause
you to be severely injured or killed.
(Continued)
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in an collision, the belt will
lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision best.
(Continued)
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the
latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make
the belt go around your lap.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the front seat.
Pulling Out The Lap/Shoulder Belt Latch Plate
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull
up a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if
it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap
belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the
belt in a collision.
Removing Slack From Belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the shoulder belt
can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt
away from your neck. Push and fully depress the button
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
above the webbing to release the anchorage, then move it you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
up or down to the position that fits you best.
anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create
a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will
the latch plate.
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are ALR and is being used for normal usage:
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Re- activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
feature for each seating position.
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
Driver
Center
Passenger
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
First Row
N/A
N/A
ALR
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Second Row
ALR
ALR
ALR
Equipped
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
• N/A — Not Applicable
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
position that has a belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if
the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is Energy Management Feature
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it collision.
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
locking mode.
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on
the occupant’s chest.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
The seat belts for both front seating positions are (BeltAlert姞)
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to BeltAlert威 is a feature intended to remind the driver and
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
These devices may improve the performance of the seat BeltAlert威) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occu- passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
pants, including those in child restraints.
fastened.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be The BeltAlert威 warning sequence begins after the vehicle
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt
worn snugly and positioned properly.
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant ReOnce the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretenduration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occupants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
2
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
(8 km/h), BeltAlert威 will provide both audio and visual We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
notification.
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
The front passenger seat BeltAlert威 is not active when the the best way to keep the baby safe.
front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert威 may be Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are the force if there is a collision.
secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
Seat Belt Extender
BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deac- If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
tivating BeltAlert威.
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
NOTE: Although BeltAlert威 has been deactivated, the dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with long enough. When it is not required, remove the exBeltAlert威) seat belt remains unfastened.
tender and store it.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use when
the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low
and snug and in the recommended seating positions.
Remove and store the extender when not needed.
2
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
In addition, the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
3 — Supplemental Driver Side
Knee Air Bag
2 — Knee Bolster
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC
Air Bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for air bags are located above the side windows and their
covers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
Advanced Air Bags.
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation based on several factors, including the severity
and type of collision.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental SeatMounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced
protection for an occupant during a side impact. The
SABs are located in the outboard side of the front seats.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front NOTE:
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon • Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front • After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The Air Bag System Components
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
Advanced Front Air Bags.
system components:
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
• Air Bag Warning Light
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
• Steering Wheel and Column
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
• Instrument Panel
• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
• Knee Impact Bolster
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
and Seat Track Position Sensors
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may
provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant
during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag
label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
bag only.
2
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact protection to front
and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that
provided by the body structure. Each air bag features
inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each
outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side- Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
impact head injuries. The curtains deploy downward, NOTE:
covering both windows on the impact side.
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The system includes side impact sensors that are calibrated to deploy the SAB and SABIC air bags during
impacts that require air bag occupant protection.
WARNING!
• If your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
The area where the SABIC is located should remain
free from any obstructions.
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side air bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• If your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags,
do not have any accessory items installed which
will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to
your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require
permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof
of the vehicle for any reason.
SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Occupants, including children who are
up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants, especially children, should not lean on or sleep against the door, side
windows, or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags
inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.
Always sit upright as possible with your back against the
seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint or Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
child.
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
required for this vehicle.
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
enhanced protection and works together with the Driver
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact.
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air
Knee Impact Bolsters
bags, SAB, Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag, and
The Knee Impact Bolster helps protect the knees of the
front seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending on
front passenger, and position the front occupant for the
several factors, including the severity and type of impact.
best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bag.
Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional protecAir Bags work with the Supplemental Driver Side Knee
tion by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal
Air Bag and the passenger side knee bolster to provide
collisions depending on several factors, including the
improved protection for the driver and front passenger.
severity and type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags
Side air bags also work with seat belts to improve
are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side,
occupant protection.
or rollover collisions.
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver
Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
including some that may produce substantial vehicle
damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other
hand, depending on the type and location of impact,
Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe
initial deceleration.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF position, or in
the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air
bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
type of collision.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
Light in the instrument panel for approxiover time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
mately four to eight seconds for a self-check
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
have deployed.
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light Inflator Units
comes on again after initial startup.
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru- Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos- When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
tics also record the nature of the malfunction.
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
WARNING!
are possible, based on several factors, including the
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru- collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
air bag system immediately.
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air Inflator Units
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are
designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator
Unit
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of
located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering collision.
column. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag. The trim cover
inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
separates and folds out of the way allowing the air bag to
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate
inflate to the full size. The air bag fully inflates in about
in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very
15 to 20 milliseconds. The Supplemental Driver Side
high speed and with such a high force that it could injure
Knee Air Bag gas is vented through small vent holes in
you if you are not seated properly, or if items are
the side of the air bag.
positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This
especially applies to children.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may Front And Side Impact Sensors
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact
deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
events.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
Enhanced Accident Response System
curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30 the communication network remains intact, and the
milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you event the ORC will determine whether to have the
are not belted and seated properly, or if items are Enhanced Accident Response System perform the followpositioned in the area where the side curtain air bag ing functions:
inflates. This especially applies to children. The side • Cut off fuel to the engine.
curtain air bag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
it is inflated.
until the ignition is cycled off.
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
the battery has power or until the ignition key is or all of the following may occur:
removed.
• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
• Unlock the doors automatically.
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF.
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
If A Deployment Occurs
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately after deployment.
immediately.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all • As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
the air bag system.
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on Maintaining Your Air Bag System
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well.
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Air Bag Warning Light
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free. If any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first
cycled to the ON/RUN.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly check
the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label located on
the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag
fuses. See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
Child Restraints
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
seat for your child.
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/
eng/roadsafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight or Age
Children who are two years old or younger
and who have not reached the height or
weight limits of their child restraint
Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
out-grown the height or weight limit of
their booster seat
Recommended Type of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a fivepoint Harness, facing forward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearwardfacing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rearwardfacing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearwardfacing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be
used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown
their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years
old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they
reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a rear
seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit perivehicle’s seat belt alone:
odically. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face
the vehicle seat?
or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle.
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the or behind their back.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
2
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Seat Belt Only
LATCH –
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors
Tether Anchor
Only
+ Top Tether
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating
position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child
restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Can the LATCH anchorages and
the seat belt be used together to
attach a rear-facing or forwardfacing child restraint?
Can a child seat be installed in the
center position using the inner
LATCH lower anchorages?
No
N/A
Use the LATCH anchorage system
until the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is
65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined
weight is more than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you
use the LATCH anchorage system
to attach a rear-facing or forwardfacing child restraint.
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower
LATCH anchorage?
No
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes, center position only.
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage
with two or more child restraints.
If the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a
child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
The child seat may touch the back
of the front passenger seat if the
child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
2
LATCH Anchorages
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position located in the
panel between the rear seatback and the rear
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
window. These tether strap anchorages are under a anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
plastic cover with the tether anchorage symbol on it.
rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks
the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position,
do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the
center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard
position.
Tether Strap Anchorages
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing
The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for
typical installation instructions.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu- 3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
restraint to get a better fit.
To Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint
4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Autorestraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seatmatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
ing position.
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat 5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
position has.
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.
2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more 6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
anchorages.
in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
2
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt them.
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
WARNING!
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both
types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of
the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is
not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can
be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will Restraints in this Vehicle
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints.” The cinching latch plate is
designed to hold the lap portion of the seatbelt tight
when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a
child restraint’s belt path. Please see the table below and
the following sections for more information about both
types of seat belts.
2
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward
facing child restraint?
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger
seat?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Can the head restraints be removed?
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
Yes, center position only.
Yes
Yes
Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the
recommended weight limit of the
child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger
seat and the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
In positions with cinching latch
plates (CINCH), the buckle stalk
may be twisted up to 3 full turns. Do
not twist the buckle stalk in a seating
position with an ALR retractor.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
Installing A Child Restraint with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need to 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbetter fit.
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
against the child seat.
strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
dren (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
attach a tether anchor.
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
2
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
in any direction.
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
vehicle seat.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chilposition. For some second row seats, you may need to
dren (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to
recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get
attach a tether anchor.
a better fit.
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
in any direction.
path.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Anchorage
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the
belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have
trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short
buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert
the latch plate into the buckle with the release button
facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4
to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child
restraint.
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position (see the
charts above), move the child restraint to
another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn 2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly
behind the seat where you are placing the child
the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate
restraint.
into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child
restraint installation tight, try a different seating position.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
2
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
Adjustable Headrest Downward Position
Adjustable Headrest Release Push Button
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
Tether Strap Mounting
1 — Cover
3 — Attaching Strap
A — Tether Strap Hook
B — Tether Anchor
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
2
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
SAFETY TIPS
Exhaust Gas
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed and
the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
(Continued)
2
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
system.
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com- Air Bag Warning Light
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
The light should come on and remain on for
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
not lit during starting, see your authorized
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while
driving, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
(Continued)
2
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
Lights
Fluid Leaks
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .114
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .110
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .114
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
▫ “Slide-On-Rod” And Extender
Features Of Sun Visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING — IF EQUIPPED . .115
▫ Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming
Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Rear Cross Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
▫ Outside Mirrors Approach Light —
䡵 Uconnect威 (4.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Uconnect威 4.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped . . . . . . .112
3
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
▫ Uconnect威 Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .142
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect威 Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect威 Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
䡵 VOICE COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
▫ Uconnect威 8.4/8.4 Nav. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
▫ Uconnect威 Voice Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
䡵 Uconnect威 Phone (8.4/8.4N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
▫ Uconnect威 8.4/8.4 Nav. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .201
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
▫ Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .205
▫ Uconnect威 Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
▫ Manual Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .171
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
▫ SmartBeam™ — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .213
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .214
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat
(Available With Memory Seat Only) . . . . . . . .216
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .218
䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .221
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available with
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
3
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Ambient Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
䡵 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED . . .
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .230
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available with
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .233
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .234
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
䡵 POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation .
. . .236
. . .238
. . .240
. . .241
. . .242
. . .242
. . .242
. . .242
. . .243
. . .244
. . .246
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .247
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode . . .264
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
▫ Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped. . . .266
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .249 䡵 PARKSENSE威 REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
▫ ParkSense威 Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
▫ ParkSense威 Warning Display . . . . . . . .
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
▫ ParkSense威 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense威 . . .
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .253
▫ Service The ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .256
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .258
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense威 System . . . . .
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .260
▫ ParkSense威 System Usage Precautions . .
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
. . . . .268
. . . . .269
. . . . .269
. . . . .270
. . . . .273
. . . . .273
. . . . .274
. . . . .274
3
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 PARKVIEW威 REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
▫ Turning ParkView威 On Or Off —
With Touch Screen Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
▫ Sunglasses Bin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED. . . .281
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink威. . .283
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .286
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .287
▫ Using HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .291
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .294
▫ Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped with 60/40
Split-Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
▫ Front Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
▫ Rear Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
▫ Glovebox Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
䡵 LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .307
3
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
Automatic
Dimming
Mirror — If Equipped
should be adjusted while the small control under the
mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield). This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. This feature will be defaulted
on, and only be disabled when the vehicle is moving in
reverse.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Automatic Dimming Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
3
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
in both mirrors when you use the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter or open any door. This LED shines
Some models have outside mirrors that are hinged. The
outward to illuminate the front and rear door handles. It
hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to
also shines downward to illuminate the area in front of
resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions: full
the doors.
forward, full rearward and normal.
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped
Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped
Equipped
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside
mirror adjusts.
Outside Mirrors Approach Light — If Equipped
Driver and passenger outside mirrors equipped with
approach lighting contain one LED, which is located in
the upper outboard mirror glass corner. The approach
light supplies illuminated entry lighting, which turns on
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the
ground rearward of the front doors. The outside mirrors
will move slightly downward from the present position
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The outside
mirrors will then return to the original position when the
vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE position. Each
stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
NOTE:
• The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned on
when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect威 System.
3
• Refer to “Uconnect威 Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel.
Power Mirror Control
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, press either the L (left) or R (right) button to select
the mirror that you want to adjust.
NOTE: A light in the select button will illuminate indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using the mirror control switch, press on any of the four swing the mirror cover upward. The light turns on
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.
move.
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by
the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver
Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
“Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun
Visor
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor. To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature of the sun visor, rotate
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
parallel to the side window, grabbing the sun visor with
your left hand pull rearwards until the sun visor is in the
desired position. To use the extender feature of the sun
visor, grab the extender which is located at the rear of the
visor and pull rearward.
BLIND SPOT MONITORING — IF EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Slide-On-Rod Feature
Rear Detection Zones
3
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by mode
when the vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
on both sides of the vehicle (11 ft or 3.35 m). The zone
starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends approximately 20 ft (6 m) to the rear of the vehicle. The BSM
system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately
6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of
vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones.
BSM Warning Light
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the Entering From The Side
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
side of the vehicle.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
Side Monitoring
3
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Entering From The Rear
Overtaking Traffic
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative of less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking/Approaching
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes.
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
3
Stationary Objects
Overtaking/Passing
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path
Opposing Traffic
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
drivers when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 to
2 mph (1 km/h to 3 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately 10 mph (16 km/h), such as in
parking lot situations.
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and deUconnect威 System. Refer to “Uconnect威 Settings” in
tected object are present on the same side at the same
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further intime, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In
formation.
addition to the audible alert, the radio (if on) volume will
Blind Spot Alert
be reduced.
Modes Of Operation
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM NOTE:
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when • Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio volume is reduced.
the system is operating in RCP, the system will respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected • If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested,
the appropriate visual alert only.
the radio volume is reduced.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode, present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro- is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the RCP state always requests the chime.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
Blind Spot Alert Off
Uconnect姞 (4.3)
When the BSM system is turned off, there will be no Uconnect姞 4.3
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
Uconnect威 Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, insystems.
vehicle communications system. Uconnect威 Phone alNOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle phone.
is started, the previously stored mode will be recalled Uconnect威 Phone supports the following features:
and used.
Voice Activated features:
Astronomy Zone — System Temporarily Unavailable
• Hands Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smiths MoWhen the vehicle enters this zone the blind spot system
bile” or, “Dial 248 555-1212”),
will become temporarily unavailable and the EVIC will
display the message “ Blind spot system unavailable- • Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”),
Astronomy zone”. The side mirrors LED’s will be lit up
• Calling Back the last incoming call number (“Call
and stay lit until the vehicle exits the zone.
Back”),
• View Call logs on screen (“Show incoming calls”,
“Show Outgoing calls”, “Show missed Calls”, “Show
Recent Calls”),
3
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for John Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your
vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically
Smith Mobile”).
mute your radio when using the Uconnect威 Phone.
Screen Activated Features:
For Uconnect威 customer support, visit the following
• Dialing via Keypad using touch-screen,
website:
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis• www.UconnectPhone.com
played on the touch-screen,
• or call 1–877–855–8400
• Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so the are
easily accessible on the Main Phone screen,
If your mobile phone only supports the Headset Profile
you may not be able to use any Uconnect威 Phone
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs,
features. Refer to your mobile service provider or the
• Listen to Music on your Bluetooth威 Device via the phone manufacturer for details.
touch-screen,
Uconnect威 Phone allows you to transfer calls between the
• Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone
to connect to them quickly.
for private conversation.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. All attention should be focused on safely operating the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone and
one audio device can be used with the system at a time.
The system is available in English, Spanish, or French
languages.
Uconnect威 Phone Button
Button is used to get
The Uconnect威 Phone
into the phone mode and make calls, show
recent, incoming, outgoing calls, view phoneThe Uconnect威 Phone is driven through your Bluetooth威
book etc., When you press the button you will
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect威 features hear a BEEP. The beep is your signal to give a command.
Bluetooth威 technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other Uconnect威 Voice Command Button
without wires or a docking station, so Uconnect威 Phone
Button is
The Uconnect威 Voice Command
works no matter where you stow your mobile phone (be
only used for “barge in” and when you are
it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone
already in a call and you want to send Tones or
is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s
make another call.
Uconnect威 Phone. The Uconnect威 Phone allows up to ten
mobile phones or audio devices to be linked to the The Uconnect威 Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect威 Phone
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control • Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or another
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
prompt.
switch), if so equipped.
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect威
“John Smith” and then “mobile”, the following comPhone and to navigate through the Uconnect威 Phone
pound command can be said: “Call John Smith
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
mobile”.
Uconnect威 Phone prompts. There are two general methods for how Voice Command works:
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound command form of the voice command is
1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith mogiven. You can also break the commands into parts and
bile”.
say each part of the command when you are asked for
2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to
it. For example, you can use the compound command
guide you to complete the task.
form voice command “Search for John Smith”, or you
can break the compound command form into two
You will be prompted for a specific command and then
voice commands: “Search Contact” and when asked
guided through the available options.
“John Smith”. Please remember, the Uconnect威 Phone
Operation
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
works best when you talk in a normal conversational do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was
tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/ requested but the specific name was not recognized.
meters away from you.
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system
requires more information from the user it will ask a
Natural Speech
question to which the user can respond without pressing
Your Uconnect威 Phone Voice system uses a Natural
the Voice Command
button.
Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
Voice Command Tree
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”
Help Command
and “eh”. The system handles fill-in words such as “I
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
would like to”.
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase the beep.
or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly
Smith”. For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen- To activate the Uconnect威 Phone from idle, simply press
button and say a command or say “help”. All
tence, the system identifies the topic or context and the
provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who Uconnect威 Phone sessions begin with a press of the
button on the radio control head.
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cancel Command
NOTE:
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and • You must have Bluetooth威 enabled on your phone to
you will be returned to the main menu.
complete this procedure.
or
buttons when the • The vehicle must be in PARK.
You can also press the
system is listening for a command and be returned to the
1. You can do either of the following:
main or previous menu.
a. Press the “Settings” hard-key, Page down to the
or
buttons while the system
NOTE: Pressing the
“Phone/Bluetooth威” soft-key, press it and you will
is playing is known as “Barging In”, refer to “Barge In —
see the “Paired Phones” screen. If there are no
Overriding Prompts” for further information.
paired phones you will see <Empty> as the first
Pair (Link) Uconnect威 Phone To A Mobile Phone
device name.
To begin using your Uconnect威 Phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled mobile phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The
Uconnect威 website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
b. Press the MORE hard-key, then press the Phone
soft-key and you will go to the Uconnect威 Phone
main screen. Press the “Settings” soft-key. If there
are no phones currently paired a pop-up will
appear. If you select “Yes” you will go the “Paired
Phones” screen, if you select “No” you will return
to the Uconnect威 Phone main menu.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
2. At the “Paired Phones” screen press the “Add Device” • Search for available devices on your Bluetooth威 enabled Audio Device. When prompted on the device,
soft-key and a pop-up with instructions will appear.
select the “Uconnect威” device and enter the PIN,
3. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth威 enabled mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, • Uconnect威 Phone will display an in process screen
while the system is connecting,
select the “Uconnect威” device and enter the PIN.
4. When the pairing process has successfully completed, • When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
this is your favorite device. Selecting Yes will make
this is your favorite phone. Selecting “Yes” will make
this device the highest priority. This device will take
this phone the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired devices within range.
precedence over other paired phones within range.
Pair A Bluetooth威 Streaming Audio Device
• Touch the “Player” hard-key to begin,
• Press the “Source” soft-key,
NOTE: If No is selected, device priority is determined by
the order in which it was paired. The latest device paired
will have the higher priority.
• Change the Source to Bluetooth威,
You can also use the following VR command to bring up
a list of paired audio devices.
• Touch the “Add Device” soft-key,
• “Show Paired Audio Devices”
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Audio Device
Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device
• Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth威” soft-key,
• Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
• Touch the “Settings” hard-key,
Uconnect威 Phone will automatically connect to the highest priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within • Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth威” soft-key,
range. If you would need to choose a particular Phone or • Select the Phone or Audio Device,
Audio Device follow these steps:
• At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Disconnect
• Touch the “Settings” hard-key,
Device” soft-key,
• Touch to select the particular Phone or the “Phone/ Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device
Audio” soft-key and then an Audio Device,
• Touch the “Settings” hard-key,
• At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Connect
• Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth威” soft-key,
Device” soft-key,
• Select the Phone or Audio Device,
• Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
• At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Delete Device” soft-key,
• Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
• Touch the “Settings” hard-key,
• Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth威” soft-key,
• Select a different Phone or Audio Device then the
currently connected device,
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect威
website for supported phones.
• To call a name from a downloaded mobile phonebook,
follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a Name”
section.
• At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Make Favor- • Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is
ite” soft-key; you will see the chosen device move to
made to the Uconnect威 Phone, for example, after you
the top of the list,
start the vehicle.
• Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downPhonebook Download — Automatic Phonebook
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected
Transfer From Mobile Phone
to the Uconnect威 Phone.
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect威 Phone automatically downloads names (text • Depending on the maximum number of entries downloaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
names) and number entries from the mobile phone’s
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail- • Touch the “911/Help” soft-key. Touch the appropriate
listing to alter, Emergency for example,
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is available for use.
• Once Emergency is touched, the Edit soft-key appears.
Touch the “Edit” soft-key and you will be given the
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
choice to Edit Number or Reset to Default,
phone is accessible.
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect威 Phone. These can only be
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transferred and updated to Uconnect威 Phone on the next
phone connection.
• Follow the on-screen prompts to complete the task.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect威 Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
Emergency And Towing Assistance
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
The 911/Help numbers can only be altered. These can not accessed through the Uconnect威 Phone. Check with your
be deleted or the names can not be changed.
mobile service provider for the features that you have.
To change the 911/Help number follow these steps.
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call
• Touch the “phonebook” soft-key from the Phone main Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call
with Uconnect威 Phone.
screen,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
• Redial,
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name
• Dial by touching in the number,
• Press the
button to begin,
• Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Number, Call by • After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Call John Doe Mobile”,
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial, or Call Back),
• Mobile Phonebook,
• Recent Call Log.
• The Uconnect威 Phone will dial the number associated
with John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers it will
ask which number you want to call for John Doe.
NOTE: All of the above operations except Redial can be
Call Controls
done with 1 call or less active.
The touch-screen allows you to control the following call
Dial By Saying A Number
features:
• Press the
button to begin,
• Answer
• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
• End
say “Dial 248-555-1212”,
• Ignore
• The Uconnect威 Phone will dial 248-555-1212.
• Hold/unhold
3
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Mute/unmute
Recent Calls
• Transfer the call to/from the phone
You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the
following call types:
• Swap 2 active calls
• Join 2 active calls together
Touch-Tone Number Entry
• Touch the “Phone” soft-key,
• Touch the “Dial” soft-key,
• The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed,
• Incoming Calls
• Outgoing Calls
• Missed Calls
• All Calls
These can be accessed by touching the recent calls
soft-key on the Phone main screen.
• Use the numbered soft-keys to enter the number and
button and say “Show my
You can also press the
touch “Call”.
incoming calls” from any screen and the Incoming calls
To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition (VR), press will be displayed.
button while in a call and say “1234#” or you
the
NOTE: Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing”,
can say “Send Voicemail Password” if Voicemail pass“Recent” or “Missed”.
word is stored in your mobile phonebook.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
NOTE: The Uconnect威 Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Uconnect威 Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system,
if on, and will display a pop-up showing Answer or Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
button on the Progress
Ignore. Press the Answer soft-key or the
steering wheel to accept the call.
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
press the
Currently In Progress
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
If a call is currently in progress and you have another call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for in progress. Or you can place a call on hold by touching
call waiting that you normally hear when using your the “Hold” soft-key on the Phone main screen, then dial
mobile phone. Uconnect威 Phone will then interrupt the a number from the dialpad, recent calls or from the
vehicle audio system, if on, and will display a pop-up phonebooks. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling
button Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer
showing Answer, Ignore or Transfer. Press the
to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming to “Join Calls” in this section.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
call.
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the new active call. If the active call is terminated by the
far end, a call on hold may not become active automatiIf two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
cally. This is cell phone-dependent.
button until you hear a single beep, indicatpress the
ing that the active and hold status of the two calls have Redial
switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.
• Press the “Redial” soft-key,
Also you can press the Swap soft-key on the Phone main
screen.
button and after the “Listening”
• or press the
prompt
and
the
following
beep, say “Redial”,
Join Calls
Toggling Between Calls
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on • After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Redial”,
hold), touch the “Join Calls” soft-key on the Phone main
screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call.
• The Uconnect威 Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your mobile phone.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the End Call Continuation
button. Only the active call(s) will be Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
soft-key or the
terminated and if there is a call on hold, it will become Uconnect威 Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can • After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Emergency” and the Uconnect威 Phone will incontinue on the Uconnect威 Phone either until the call
struct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada,
cessation of the call on the Uconnect威 Phone and
and Mexico.
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
Uconnect姞 Phone Features
NOTE:
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
reachable:
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
area.
number for your area.
• The Uconnect威 Phone does slightly lower your
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect威 Phone is
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
for the mobile phone directly.
follows:
Emergency Assistance
• Press the
button to begin,
3
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Your phone must be turned on and connected to the
Uconnect威 Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature
in emergency situations, when the mobile phone has
network coverage and stays connected to the
Uconnect威 Phone.
Roadside Assistance
If you need roadside assistance:
• Press the
button to begin,
NOTE:
• The towing assistance number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-5282069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-143454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the Chrysler
Group LLC 24-Hour “Roadside Assistance” coverage
details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the
24–Hour Roadside Assistance Card.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep, with Automated Systems”.
say “Roadside Assistance”.
Working With Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. For example, if you previously created a Phonebook entry and/or Last Name as “Voice Password”, then
if you press the
button and say “Send Voicemail
Password”, the Uconnect威 Phone will then send the
When calling a number with your Uconnect威 Phone that
corresponding phone number associated with the phonenormally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
book entry, as tones over the phone.
on your mobile phone keypad, you can utilize the
button and say the word NOTE:
touch-screen or press the
“Send” then the sequence you wish to enter. For example,
• The first number encountered for that contact will be
if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7
sent. All other numbers entered for that contact will be
button and say, “Send 3 7 4
4 6 #), you can press the
ignored.
6 #”. Saying “Send” followed by a number, or sequence of
numbers, is also to be used for navigating through an • You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
automated customer service center menu structure, and
network configurations. This is normal.
to leave a number on a pager.
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
You can use your Uconnect威 Phone to access a voice mail
system or an automated service, such as a paging service
or automated customer service line. Some services require immediate response selection. In some instances,
that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect威 Phone.
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Pauses, wait or other characters that are supported by • Touch the “Display” soft-key, then scroll down to Voice
Response Length,
some phones are not supported over Bluetooth威.
These additional symbols will be ignored in the dialing
• Select either “Brief” or “Detailed” by touching the box
a numbered sequence.
next to the selection. A check-mark will appear to
show your selection.
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
The
button can be used when you wish to skip part
of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately.
For example, if a prompt is asking “There are 2 numbers
with the name John. Say the full name” you could press
button and say, “John Smith” to select that
the
option without having to listen to the rest of the voice
prompt.
Voice Response Length
It is possible for you to choose between Brief and
Detailed Voice Response Length.
• Touch the “More” hard-key, then touch the “Settings”
soft-key,
Phone And Network Status Indicators
Uconnect威 Phone will provide notification to inform you
of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect威 Phone. The
status is given for roaming, network signal strength and
phone battery strength.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
WARNING!
Your new vehicle has many features for the comfort
and convenience of you and your passengers. Some
of these should not be used when driving because
they take your eyes from the road or your attention
from driving. Never dial using the mobile phone
keypad while driving.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect威 Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect威 Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
keypad and still use the Uconnect威 Phone (while dialing
order to mute the Uconnect威 Phone simply touch the
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
“Mute” button on the Phone main screen.
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 mobile
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The Uconnect威 Phone will work the same
as if you dial the number using voice a command.
3
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect姞
Phone
The Uconnect威 Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans- Voice Command
ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect威 Phone • For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
provide at least ½ in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
from your paired mobile phone to the Uconnect威 Phone
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
or vice versa, press the Transfer button on the Phone
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
main screen.
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
Uconnect威 Phone And Mobile Phone
you.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威
connection between a Uconnect威 Phone paired mobile
phone and the Uconnect威 Phone, follow the instructions
described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking • When navigating through an automated system such
during a Voice Command period.
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send”.
• Performance is maximized under:
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
• low-to-medium blower setting,
not in motion is recommended.
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather condition.
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish accents, the system may not always work for some.
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding names
in the Uconnect威 Phonebook.
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect威 Phone Local) name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar.
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”.
• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather conditions, and
• operation from the driver’s seat.
• Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
not the Uconnect威 Phone.
compromised with the convertible top down.
Far End Audio Performance
• Audio quality is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Bluetooth威 Communication Link
Power-Up
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
Uconnect威 Phone. When this happens, the connection ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth威 ON mode.
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Tree
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
• If your phone does not support phonebook download
or call log download over Bluetooth than these com• You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
mands will return a response that the contact does not
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send
exist in the phonebook.
a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you
which phone number you want to send a message to • Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
for John Smith.
NOTE:
• You can replace “Mobile” with “Home”, “Work” or General Information
“Other”.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
• You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
Calls” or “Missed Calls”.
• Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect sys- • Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
tem is equipped with this feature and the mobile
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
phone supports messaging over Bluetooth.
• You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone
number supported by your Mobile phone.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op• You can replace “4” with any message number shown
eration.
on the screen.
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect姞 Phone (8.4/8.4N)
Uconnect姞 8.4/8.4 Nav
• Calling Back the last incoming call number (“Call
Back”).
Uconnect威 Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- • View Call logs on screen (“Show incoming calls”,
“Show Outgoing calls”, “Show missed Calls”, “Show
vehicle communications system. Uconnect威 Phone alRecent Calls”).
lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
phone.
• Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for John
Smith Mobile”).
Uconnect威 Phone supports the following features:
Voice Activated Features:
Screen Activated Features
• Hands Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith’s • Dialing via Keypad using touch-screen.
Mobile” or, “Dial 248 555-1212”).
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks displayed on the touch-screen.
• Hands Free text to speech listening of your incoming
• Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so the are
easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.
• Hands Free text messaging (“Send a message to John
Smith’s Mobile”).
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs.
SMS messages.
• Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
• Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
• Sending a text message via the touch-screen.
• Listen to Music on your Bluetooth威 Device via the
touch-screen.
• Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access
to connect to them quickly.
NOTE: Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging
via Bluetooth威 for messaging features to work properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your
vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically
mute your radio when using the Uconnect威 Phone.
vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone
for private conversation.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. All attention should be focused on safely operating the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in an accident
causing serious injury or death.
The Uconnect威 Phone is driven through your Bluetooth威
For Uconnect威 customer support, visit the following “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect威 features
website:
Bluetooth威 technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other
• www.UconnectPhone.com
without wires or a docking station, so Uconnect威 Phone
• or call 1–877–855–8400
works no matter where you stow your mobile phone (be
Uconnect威 Phone allows you to transfer calls between the it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone
system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect威 Phone. The Uconnect威 Phone allows up to ten
mobile phones or audio devices to be linked to the
system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone and
one audio device can be used with the system at a time.
The system is available in English, Spanish, or French
languages.
The
button is also used to access the Voice Commands for the Uconnect威 Voice Command features if
your vehicle is equipped. Please see the Uconnect威 Voice
Command section for direction on how to use the
button.
The Uconnect威 Phone is fully integrated with the vehicles
audio system. The volume of the Uconnect威 Phone can be
adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or
Button is used to get
The Uconnect威 Phone
from the steering wheel radio control (right switch), if so
into the phone mode and make calls, show
equipped.
recent, incoming, outgoing calls, view phonebook etc., When you press the button you will Operation
hear a BEEP. The beep is your signal to give a command. Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect威
Uconnect威 Phone Button
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect威 Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Button is
The Uconnect威 Voice Command
Uconnect威 Phone prompts. There are two general methonly used for “barge in” and when you are
ods for how Voice Command works:
already in a call and you want to send Tones or
make another call.
1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith mobile”.
Uconnect威 Voice Command Button
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to
guide you to complete the task.
You will be prompted for a specific command and then
guided through the available options.
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or another
prompt.
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then
“John Smith” and then “mobile”, the following compound command can be said: “Call John Smith
mobile”.
it. For example, you can use the compound command
form voice command “Search for John Smith”, or you
can break the compound command form into two
voice commands: “Search Contact” and when asked
“John Smith”. Please remember, the Uconnect威 Phone
works best when you talk in a normal conversational
tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/
meters away from you.
Natural Speech
Your Uconnect威 Phone Voice system uses a Natural
Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”
compound command form of the voice command is
and “eh”. The system handles fill-in words such as “I
given. You can also break the commands into parts and
would like to”.
say each part of the command when you are asked for
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase
or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly
Smith”. For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence, the system identifies the topic or context and
provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who
do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was
requested but the specific name was not recognized.
To activate the Uconnect威 Phone from idle, simply press
the
button and say a command or say “help”. All
Uconnect威 Phone sessions begin with a press of the
button on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu.
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system
or
buttons when the
requires more information from the user it will ask a You can also press the
system
is
listening
for
a
command
and
be returned to the
question to which the user can respond without pressing
main
or
previous
menu.
button.
the Voice Command
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
or
buttons while the system
NOTE: Pressing the
is playing is known as “Barging In”, refer to “Barge In —
Overriding Prompts” for further information.
Pair (Link) Uconnect威 Phone To A Mobile Phone
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
To begin using your Uconnect威 Phone, you must pair
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled mobile phone.
the beep.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The
Uconnect威 website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
NOTE:
• You must have Bluetooth威 enabled on your phone to
complete this procedure.
• The vehicle must be in PARK.
1. Press the “Phone” soft-key on the screen to begin.
2. If there is no phone currently connected with the
3. Select Yes to begin the pairing process. Then, search
system, a pop-up will appear.
for available devices on your Bluetooth威 enabled
mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, enter
the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect威 screen.
• If No is selected, touch the “Settings” soft-key from
the Uconnect威 Phone main screen,
• Touch the “Add Device” soft-key,
3
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Search for available devices on your Bluetooth威 5. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
enabled mobile phone. When prompted on the
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
phone, enter the name and PIN shown on the
this is your favorite phone. Selecting Yes will make
Uconnect威 screen,
this phone the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within range.
• See Step 4 to complete the process.
4. Uconnect威 Phone will display an in progress screen Pair Additional Mobile Phones
while the system is connecting.
• Touch the “Settings” soft-key from the Phone main
screen,
• Next, touch the “Phone/Bluetooth威” soft-key,
• Touch the “Add Device” soft-key,
• Search for available devices on your Bluetooth威 enabled mobile phone. When prompted on the phone,
enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect威
screen,
• Uconnect威 Phone will display an in process screen
while the system is connecting,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
• When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
this is your favorite phone. Selecting Yes will make this
phone the highest priority. This phone will take precedence over other paired phones within range.
NOTE: For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone priority is determined by the order in which it was
paired. The latest phone paired will have the higher
priority.
You can also use the following VR commands to bring up
the Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio:
• “Show Paired Phones” or
• “Connect My Phone”
Pair A Bluetooth威 Streaming Audio Device
• Touch the “Player” or “Media” soft-key to begin,
• Change the Source to Bluetooth威,
• Touch the “Bluetooth威” soft-key to display the Paired
Audio Devices screen,
• Touch the “Add Device” soft-key,
3
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If there is no device currently connected with the You can also use the following VR command to bring up
system, a pop-up will appear.
a list of paired audio devices.
• Search for available devices on your Bluetooth威 en- • “Show Paired Audio Devices”
abled audio device. When prompted on the device,
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect威
Audio Device
screen,
Uconnect威 Phone will automatically connect to the high• Uconnect威 Phone will display an in process screen est priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within
while the system is connecting,
range. If you would need to choose a particular phone or
• When the pairing process has successfully completed, Audio Device follow these steps:
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not • Touch the “Settings” soft-key,
this is your favorite device. Selecting Yes will make
this device the highest priority. This device will take • Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth威” soft-key,
precedence over other paired devices within range.
• Touch to select the particular Phone or the “Paired
Audio Sources” soft-key and then an Audio Device,
NOTE: For devices which are not made a favorite, the
device priority is determined by the order in which it was • Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
paired. The latest device paired will have the higher
priority.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
Disconnecting A Phone or Audio Device
• The options pop-up will be displayed,
• Touch the “Settings” soft-key,
• Touch the “Delete Device” soft-key,
• Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth威” soft-key,
• Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
• Touch the + soft-key located to the right of the device Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
name,
• Touch the “Settings” soft-key,
• The options pop-up will be displayed,
• Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth威” soft-key,
• Touch the “Disconnect Device” soft-key,
• Touch the + soft-key located to the right of the device
name,
• Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device
• The options pop-up will be displayed,
• Touch the “Settings” soft-key,
• Touch the “Make Favorite” soft-key; you will see the
chosen device move to the top of the list,
• Touch the Phone/Bluetooth威 soft-key,
• Touch the + soft-key located to the right of the device
name for a different Phone or Audio Device than the
currently connected device,
• Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
3
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Phonebook Download — Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the Uconnect威 Phone.
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect威 Phone automatically downloads names (text • Depending on the maximum number of entries downnames) and number entries from the mobile phone’s
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if availAccess Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect威
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is availwebsite for supported phones.
able for use.
• To call a name from a downloaded mobile phonebook, • Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a Name”
phone is accessible.
section.
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
deleted on the Uconnect威 Phone. These can only be
as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transmade to the Uconnect威 Phone, for example, after you
ferred and updated to Uconnect威 Phone on the next
start the vehicle.
phone connection.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
Managing Your Favorite Phonebook
There are three ways you can add an entry to your
Favorite Phonebook.
1. During an active call of a number to make a favorite,
touch and hold a favorite button on the top of the
phone main screen.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select phonebook from the Phone main screen, then select the
appropriate number. Touch the + next to the selected
number to display the options pop-up. In the pop-up
select “Add to Favorites”.
3
NOTE: If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
3. From the Phone main screen, select phonebook. From
the phonebook screen, select the “Favorites” soft-key
and then select the + soft-key located to the right of the
phonebook record. Select an empty entry and touch
the + on that selected entry. When the Options pop-up
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
appears, touch “Add from Mobile”. You will then be • Next select Favorites on the left side of the screen and
then touch the + Options soft-key.
asked which contact and number to choose from your
mobile phonebook. When complete the new favorite
• Touch the + next to the Favorite you would like to
will be shown.
remove.
To Remove A Favorite
• To remove a Favorite, select phonebook from the
Phone main screen.
• The Options pop-up will display, touch “Remove from
Favs”.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
Emergency And Towing Assistance
The Emergency and Towing Favorite numbers can only
be altered. These cannot be deleted and the names cannot
be changed.
To change the Emergency or Towing number follow these
steps.
• Touch the “Phonebook” soft-key from the Phone main
screen.
• Touch the “Favorites” soft-key. Next scroll to the
bottom of the list to locate the Emergency and Towing
Favorites.
• The Options pop-up will appear and you can choose
between Editing the number or resetting the number
• Touch the + Options soft-key.
to default.
• Touch the + next to appropriate Favorite that is to be
Phone Call Features
altered.
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect威 Phone if the feature(s) are available and
supported by Bluetooth威 on your mobile service plan.
3
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
For example, if your mobile service plan provides three- NOTE: All of the above operations except Redial can be
way calling, this feature can be accessed through the done with 1 call or less active.
Uconnect威 Phone. Check with your mobile service proDial By Saying A Number
vider for the features that you have.
• Press the
button to begin,
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call
Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call • After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Dial 248-555-1212”,
with Uconnect威 Phone.
• Redial
• Dial by touching in the number
• The Uconnect威 Phone will dial the number 248-5551212.
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name
• Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by
• Press the
button to begin,
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial, or Call Back)
• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
• Favorite Phonebook
say “Call John Doe Mobile”,
• Mobile Phonebook
• The Uconnect威 Phone will dial the number associated
• Recent Call Log
with John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers it will
ask which number you want to call for John Doe.
• SMS Message Viewer
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
Call Controls
Touch-Tone Number Entry
The touch-screen allows you to control the following call •
features:
•
• Answer
•
• End
•
• Ignore
• Hold/unhold
• Mute/unmute
• Transfer the call to/from the phone
• Swap 2 active calls
• Join 2 active calls together
Touch the “Phone” soft-key,
Touch the “Dial” soft-key,
The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed,
Use the numbered soft-keys to enter the number and
touch “Call”.
To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition (VR), press
button while in a call and say “Send 1234#” or
the
you can say “Send Voicemail Password” if Voicemail
password is stored in your mobile phonebook.
3
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Recent Calls
• All Calls
You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the These can be accessed by touching the “recent calls”
following call types:
soft-key on the Phone main screen.
button and say “Show my
You can also press the
incoming calls” from any screen and the Incoming calls
will be displayed.
button and say “Show my
You can also press the
recent calls” from any screen and the All calls screen will
be displayed.
NOTE: Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing”,
“Recent” or “Missed”.
• Incoming Calls
• Outgoing Calls
• Missed Calls
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect威 Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system,
if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the call.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
Press the
button to accept the call. To ignore the call,
touch the “Ignore” soft-key on the touch-screen. You can
also touch the “answer” soft-key or touch the caller ID
box.
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
button, answer softmobile phone. Press the phone
key or caller ID box to place the current call on hold and
answer the incoming call.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the
button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
in progress. Or you can place a call on hold by touching
the Hold soft-key on the Phone main screen, then dial a
number from the dialpad, recent calls, SMS Inbox or from
the phonebooks. To go back to the first call, refer to
“Toggling Between Calls” in this section. To combine two
calls, refer to “Join Calls” in this section.
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
NOTE: The Uconnect威 Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call During an active call, touch the “Hold” soft-key on the
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can Phone main screen.
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
3
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Toggling Between Calls
Redial
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), • Press the “Redial” soft-key,
touch the “Swap” soft-key on the Phone main screen.
and after the “Listening” prompt and
• or press the
Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.
the following beep, say “Redial”,
button to toggle between the
You can also press the
• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
active and held phone call.
say “Redial”,
Join Calls
• The Uconnect威 Phone will call the last number that
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
was dialed from your mobile phone.
hold), touch the “Join Calls” soft-key on the Phone main
Call Continuation
screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call.
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Call Termination
Uconnect威 Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
but- switched to OFF.
ton or the end soft-key. Only the active call(s) will be
terminated and if there is a call on hold, it will become NOTE: The call will remain within the vehicle audio
the new active call. If the active call is terminated by the system until the phone becomes out of range for the
far end, a call on hold may not become active automati- Bluetooth威 connection. It is recommended to press the
“transfer” soft-key when leaving the vehicle.
cally. This is cell phone-dependent.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
Uconnect姞 Phone Features
NOTE:
Emergency Assistance
• The Emergency call may also be initiated by using the
touch-screen.
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
number for your area.
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect威 Phone is
area.
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
• The Uconnect威 Phone does slightly lower your
follows:
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
button to begin.
• Press the
for the mobile phone directly.
• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Call Emergency” or “Dial Emergency” and the
Uconnect威 Phone will instruct the paired mobile
phone to call the emergency number. This feature is
supported in the U.S., Canada, and Mexico.
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Your phone must be turned on and connected to the
Uconnect威 Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature
in emergency situations, when the mobile phone has
network coverage and stays connected to the
Uconnect威 Phone.
Roadside Assistance
If you need roadside assistance:
• Press the
button to begin.
• The roadside assistance number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-5282069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-143454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the Chrysler
Group LLC 24-Hour “Roadside Assistance” coverage
details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the
24–Hour Roadside Assistance Card.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
with Automated Systems”.
• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep, Working With Automated Systems
say “Roadside Assistance”.
This method is used in instances where one generally has
NOTE:
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
• The roadside assistance call may also be initiated by
touch.
You can use your Uconnect威 Phone to access a voice mail
system or an automated service, such as a paging service
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
or automated customer service line. Some services re- Password”, then if you press the
button and say
quire immediate response selection. In some instances, “Send Voicemail Password” the Uconnect威 Phone will
that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect威 Phone.
then send the corresponding phone number associated
with the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.
When calling a number with your Uconnect威 Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence NOTE:
on your mobile phone keypad, you can utilize the
• The first number encountered for that contact will be
button and say the word
touch-screen or press the
sent. All other numbers entered for that contact will be
“Send” then the sequence you wish to enter. For example,
ignored.
if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7
button and say, “Send 3 7 4 • You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
4 6 #), you can press the
6 #”. Saying “Send” followed by a number, or sequence of
network configurations. This is normal.
numbers, is also to be used for navigating through an
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
automated customer service center menu structure, and
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
to leave a number on a pager.
use of this feature.
You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as
• Pauses, wait or other characters that are supported by
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
some phones are not supported over Bluetooth威.
entries. For example, if you previously created a PhoneThese additional symbols will be ignored in the dialing
book entry with First and/or Last Name as “Voicemail
a numbered sequence.
3
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Select either “Brief” or “Detailed” by touching the box
next to the selection. A check-mark will appear to
The
button can be used when you wish to skip part
show your selection.
of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately.
For example, if a prompt is asking “There are 2 numbers Phone And Network Status Indicators
with the name John. Say the full name” you could press
Uconnect威 Phone will provide notification to inform you
button and say, “John Smith” to select that
the
of your phone and network status when you are attemptoption without having to listen to the rest of the voice
ing to make a phone call using Uconnect威 Phone. The
prompt.
status is given for network signal strength and phone
Voice Response Length
battery strength.
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
It is possible for you to choose between Brief and
Detailed Voice Response Length.
• Touch the “More” soft-key (where available), then
touch the “Settings” soft-key,
• Touch the “Display” soft-key, then scroll down to Voice
Response Length,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
WARNING!
Your new vehicle has many features for the comfort
and convenience of you and your passengers. Some
of these should not be used when driving because
they take your eyes from the road or your attention
from driving. Never dial using the mobile phone
keypad while driving.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect威 Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect威 Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
keypad and still use the Uconnect威 Phone (while dialing
order to mute the Uconnect威 Phone simply touch the
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
Mute button on the Phone main screen.
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 mobile Advanced Phone Connectivity
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
audio system. The Uconnect威 Phone will work the same
The Uconnect威 Phone allows ongoing calls to be transas if you dial the number using voice a command.
ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect威 Phone
3
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call • Always wait for the beep before speaking.
from your paired mobile phone to the Uconnect威 Phone
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
or vice versa, press the Transfer button on the Phone
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
main screen.
you.
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
Uconnect威 Phone And Mobile Phone
during a voice command period.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威
• Performance is maximized under:
connection between a Uconnect威 Phone paired mobile
• low-to-medium blower setting,
phone and the Uconnect威 Phone, follow the instructions
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
• low road noise,
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect姞
• smooth road surface,
Phone
• fully closed windows,
Voice Command
• dry weather condition.
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least ½ in (1 cm) gap between the overhead • Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish acconsole (if equipped) and the mirror.
cents, the system may not always work for some.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
• When navigating through an automated system such Far End Audio Performance
as voice mail, or when sending a page, before speaking
• Audio quality is maximized under:
the digit string, make sure to say “Send”.
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• It is recommended that you do not store names in your
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in motion.
• low road noise,
• Phonebook (Mobile and Favorites) name recognition
• smooth road surface,
rate is optimized when the entries are not similar.
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather conditions, and
• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
• operation from the driver’s seat.
• Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing • Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
number combinations may not be supported.
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the Uconnect威 Phone.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
• Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
3
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
SMS
Uconnect威 Phone can read or send new messages on
your phone.
Your phone must support SMS over Bluetooth威 in order
to use this feature. If the Uconnect威 Phone determines
your phone is not compatible with SMS messaging over
Bluetooth威 the “Messaging” button will be greyed out
and the feature will not be available for use.
NOTE: Uconnect威 Phone SMS is only available when
the vehicle is not in moving.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
Read Messages:
Once a message is received and viewed or listened to,
you will have the following options:
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
connected to Uconnect威 Phone, an announcement will be • Send a Reply
made to notify you that you have a new text message.
• Forward
• Call
3
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Send Messages Using Soft-Keys:
You can send messages using Uconnect威 Phone. To send
a new message:
• Touch the “Phone” soft-key,
• Touch the “messaging” soft-key then “New Message”,
• Touch one of the 18 preset messages and the person
you wish to send the message to,
• If multiple numbers are available for the contact select
which number you would like to have the message
sent,
• Press “Send” or “Cancel”.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
Send Messages Using Voice Commands:
• Press the
button,
• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Send message to John Smith mobile”,
• After the system prompts you for what message you
want to send, say the message you wish to send or say
“List”. There are 18 preset messages.
While the list of defined messages are being read, you can
button and
interrupt the system by pressing the
saying the message you want to send.
After the system confirms that you want to send your
message to John Smith, your message will be sent.
3
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
List of Preset Messages:
10. I will be <number> minutes late.
1. Yes.
11. See you in <number> minutes.
2. No.
12. Stuck in traffic.
3. Okay.
13. Start without me.
4. I can’t talk right now.
14. Where are you?
5. Call me.
15. Are you there yet?
6. I’ll call you later.
16. I need directions.
7. I’m on my way.
17. I’m lost.
8. Thanks.
18. See you later.
9. I’ll be late.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
Bluetooth威 Communication Link
Power-Up
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
Uconnect威 Phone. When this happens, the connection ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
OFF/ON. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain
in Bluetooth威 ON mode.
3
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Tree
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
• Send dial tones for automated systems is available
while a call is active. This is an example that uses a
You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
Phonebook Record named “Voicemail Password.”
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send
a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you • Storing Dial tones in contact names is possible but only
which phone number you want to send a message to
the first number encountered in a contact name will be
sent. For example if there is a number stored in the
for John Smith.
Home and Work numbers for the contact “Voicemail
You can replace “Mobile” with “Home”, “Work” or
password” only the Home number will be sent
“Other”.
• If your phone does not support phonebook download
You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing
or call log download over Bluetooth than these comCalls” or “Missed Calls”.
mands will return a response that the contact does not
exist in the phonebook.
You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone
number supported by your Mobile phone.
• Emergency and Towing assistance are contacts that have
NOTE:
•
•
•
•
been pre-loaded in the phonebooks. Commands such as
• These commands can be used during a phone call after
“Call Emergency” and “Call Towing Assistance” will call
pushing the Uconnect威 Voice Command button on the
the corresponding number stored with those contacts.
steering wheel. Please note the call will be muted
while the VR session is active.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
3
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
• Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect system is equipped with this feature and the mobile
• You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
phone supports messaging over Bluetooth.
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send
a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you • You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone
which phone number you want to send a message to
number supported by your Mobile phone.
for John Smith.
• You can replace “4” with any message number shown
• You can replace “Mobile” with “Home”, “Work” or
on the screen.
“Other”.
• If your phone does not support phonebook download
• You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing
or call log download over Bluetooth than these comCalls” or “Missed Calls”.
mands will return a response that the contact does not
exist in the phonebook.
NOTE:
3
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold VOICE COMMAND
face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
Uconnect姞 8.4/8.4 Nav
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
The Uconnect威 Voice Command system allows
you to control your AM, FM radio, satellite
radio, disc player, SD Card, USB/iPod and
Sirius Travel Link.
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Command
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
system as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Command system to recognize user voice
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking
• This device must accept any interference received, or a raised voice level.
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
3
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws. All attention should be focused on safely
operating the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a
collision causing serious injury or death.
If a command is not spoken a second time, the system
will respond with an error and give some direction as
what can be said based on the context you are in. After
three consecutive failures of a spoken command the VR
session with end.
Pressing the Uconnect威 Voice Command
button
while the system is speaking is known as “barging in.”
When you press the Uconnect威 Voice Command The system will be interrupted, and after the beep, you
button, you will hear a beep. The beep is your signal can say a command. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
to give a command.
If no command is spoken the system will say one of two NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel” or
“Help”.
responses:
• I didn’t understand
• I didn’t get that, etc.,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
These commands are universal and can be used from any Natural Speech
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
the active application.
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”
and “eh”. The system handles fill-in words such as “I
a normal speaking volume.
would like to”.
The system will best recognize your speech if the windows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase
set to low.
or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your Smith”. For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence, the system identifies the topic or context and
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who
To hear available commands, press the Uconnect威 Voice do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was
button and say “Help”. You will hear requested but the specific name was not recognized.
Command
available commands for the screen displayed.
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system
requires more information from the user it will ask a
question to which the user can respond without pressing
button.
the Uconnect威 Voice Command
3
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect姞 Voice Commands
Changing the Volume
The Uconnect威 Voice Command system understands two 1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
types of commands. Universal commands are available at
button.
all times. Local commands are available if the supported
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
radio mode is active.
Start a dialogue by pressing the Uconnect威 Voice Com- 3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Combutton.
mand
mand system is speaking. Please note the volume
setting for Voice Command is different than the audio
system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
Starting Voice Recognition (VR) Session in
Radio/Player Modes
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
Disc
To switch to the disc mode, say “Change source to Disc”.
This command can be given in any mode or screen:
NOTE: The commands can be said on any screen when • “Track” (#) (to change the track)
a call is not active after pushing the Uconnect威 Voice
button.
Command
3
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Tree
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
NOTE:
3. You can replace “8” with any other satellite station
named received by the radio.
1. You can replace “950 AM” with any other AM or FM
frequency, such as “98.7 FM”.
4. You can replace “rock” with any of the satellite music
types.
2. You can replace “80’s on 8” with any other satellite
station name received by the radio.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.
3
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
NOTE:
3. Playlist, Podcast and audio book commands are only
available when the iPod is connected and playing.
1. You can replace the album, artist, song, genre, playlist,
podcast and audio book names with any correspond- 4. VR commands, Albums, Artists, and Genre names are
ing names on the current device that is playing.
based on the music database provided by Gracenote.
2. You can replace “8” with any track on the CD that is NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
currently playing. Command is only available when face and shaded grey.
CD is playing.
3
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
3. You can also say “Show Current Weather” or “Show
extended weather” or “Show five day forecast” or
1. You can replace “NFL” with any league shown on the
“Show ski info” to get other forecasts.
sports league screen. For example you can say “Show
MLB headlines” or “Show PGA headlines”.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.
2. You can replace “Headlines” with any menu items
shown on a league screen. For example you can say
“Show NFL Schedule and results” or “Show NCAA
Basketball AP top 25” or “Show Major League Baseball
Teams”.
NOTE:
3
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
NOTE:
1. Only available with Navigation equipped vehicles.
3. Navigation commands only work if equipped with
Navigation.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
2. You can replace “Player” with “Radio”, “Navigation”,
face and shaded grey.
“Phone”, “Climate”, “More” or “Settings”.
3
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
NOTE:
1. You can also say “Find City”, “Find Favorite”, “Find
Play by Category”, “Find Play by Name”, “Find
Recently Found”, “Where to?” or “Go Home”.
2. You can say “Find Nearest” then “Restaurant”, “Fuel”,
“Transit”, “Lodging”, “Shopping”, “Bank”, “Entertainment”, “Recreation”, “Attractions”, “Community”, “Auto Services”, “Hospitals”, “Parking”, “Airport”, “Police Stations”, “Fire Stations”, or “Auto
Dealers”.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.
Power Seats — If Equipped
SEATS
On models equipped with power seats, the switch is
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor.
Use this switch to move the driver’s seat up or down,
vehicle.
forward or rearward or to recline the seatback.
3
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The passenger’s seat will move up or down, Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
forward or rearward.
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
Power Seat Switches
1 — Seat Control
2 — Seatback Control
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
Reclining The Seatback
WARNING! (Continued)
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
3
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
power seat. Push the switch forward or rearward to
increase or decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch
upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar
support.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be
equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and
seatbacks.
The front driver and passenger heated seats are operated
using the Uconnect威 System.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
Power Lumbar Switch
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
Front Heated Seat Operations — Vehicles
Equipped With Uconnect威 8.4 and 8.4 Nav:
Press the “Controls” soft-key located on the Uconnect威
display.
3
Front Heated Seat Operation — Vehicles Equipped
With Uconnect威 4.3:
Press the CLIMATE hard-key (located next to the
Uconnect威 screen) to enter the climate control screen.
Press the “Driver” or “Pass” seat soft-key (located on the Uconnect威 screen) once to select
HI-level heating. Press the soft-key a second
time to select LO-level heating. Press the softkey a third time to shut the heating elements OFF.
Controls Soft-Key
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft-key
once to select HI-level heating. Press the softkey a second time to select LO-level heating.
Press the soft-key a third time to shut the
heating elements OFF.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating
the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
Vehicle Equipped With Remote Start
Heated Seats Soft-Keys
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
driver’s heated seat can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
— If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
Rear Heated Seats
On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped
with heated seats. The heated seat switches for these
seats are located on the rear of the center console. There
are two heated seat switches that allow the rear passengers to operate the seats independently.
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LO-level after a
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. Amber
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two
to one, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will
LO and none for OFF.
turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes.
Press the switch once to select HI-level heating.
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Press the switch a second time to select LOlevel heating. Press the switch a third time to On some models, both the driver and passenger seats are
ventilated. Located in the seat cushion and seatback are
shut the heating elements OFF.
small fans that draw air from the seat surface through
NOTE:
fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within and front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures.
two to five minutes.
3
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The ventilated seats can be operated using the Uconnect威 Press the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft-key once to
select HI-level ventilation. Press the soft-key a second
System.
time to select LO-level ventilation. Press the soft-key a
Front Ventilated Seat Operation — Uconnect威
third time to shut off the seat ventilation.
8.4/8.4 Nav:
Press the “Controls” soft-key located on the bottom of the
Uconnect威 display.
Ventilated Seats Soft-Keys
Controls Soft-Key
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
driver’s ventilated seat can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
— If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
3
Manual Seats — If Equipped
Forward Or Rearward Adjustment
The adjusting bar is at the front of the seat, near the floor.
Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the seat is in the position
desired. Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have
latched.
Manual Seat Adjusting Bar
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
Manual Recline Lever
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
Head Restraints
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Active Head Restraints (AHR). In the event of a rear
impact the AHRs will automatically extend forward
minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants
head and the AHR.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
The AHRs will automatically return to their normal
position following a rear impact. If the AHRs do not
return to their normal position see your authorized
dealer immediately.
3
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either
of the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the operation
of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
Rear Head Restraints
Push Button
The center head restraint has two positions, up or down.
When the center seat is being occupied the head restraint
should be in the raised position. When there are no
occupants in the center seat the head restraint can be
lowered for maximum visibility for the driver.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head NOTE: The outboard head restraints are not adjustable.
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push Before Starting Your Vehicle” for tether routing.
downward on the head restraint.
Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an
additional storage area. To fold the rear seatback, pull on
the loops located on the upper seatback.
Push Button
3
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: These loops can be tucked away when not in use.
Folded Rear Seatback
Rear Seatback Loop
After releasing the seatback, it can be folded forward.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat, side mirrors, adjustable
pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steering column (if equipped) and a set of desired radio
station presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed.
NOTE:
• Only one RKE transmitter can be linked to each of the
memory positions.
• Passive Entry door handles cannot be linked to the
memory function. Use either the memory recall switch
or the RKE transmitter (if linked to the memory
feature) to recall memory positions 1 or 2.
3
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The memory seat switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons: The (S)
button, which is used to activate the memory save
function and the (1) and (2) buttons which are used to
recall either of two pre-programmed memory profiles.
Programming The Memory Feature
NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase an
existing profile from memory.
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
1. Place the ignition into the RUN position.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals [if
equipped], power tilt and telescopic steering column
[if equipped], and radio station presets).
3. Press and release the SET (S) button on the memory
switch.
Memory Seat Switches
4. Within five seconds, press and release the MEMORY
button 1 or 2. The Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) (if equipped) will display which
memory position has been set.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
NOTE:
To program your RKE transmitters, perform the following:
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a 1. Remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or change the
ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with Keyless
memory profile.
Enter-N-Go).
• The Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock feature
can be turned on and off using the Uconnect威 System, 2. Select desired memory profile 1 or 2.
refer to “Uconnect威 Settings” in “Understanding Your
3. Once the profile has been recalled, press and release
Instrument Panel” for further information.
the SET (S) button on the memory switch, then press
and release the side of the rocker switch labeled 1 or 2
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display
Transmitter To Memory
in the instrument cluster on vehicles equipped with
Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one
the EVIC.
of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pressing the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
4. Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE
transmitter within 10 seconds.
3
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
MEMORY buttons (S, 1, or 2) on the driver’s door during
a recall. When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat, side
mirror, adjustable pedals (if equipped), and power tilt
and telescopic steering column (if equipped) stop movMemory Position Recall
ing. A delay of one second will occur before another recall
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory can be selected.
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
in PARK, a message will display in the EVIC (if
(Available With Memory Seat Only)
equipped).
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
To recall the memory settings for driver 1, press
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
MEMORY button number 1 on the driver’s door or the
vehicle.
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
The distance the driver’s seat moves depends on where
memory position 1.
you have the driver’s seat positioned when you remove
To recall the memory setting for driver 2, press MEMORY
the Key Fob from the ignition (or change the ignition to
button number 2 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCK
OFF, for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go).
button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position
• When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or
2.
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with
NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your
memory settings by pressing the SET (S) button followed
by the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter in Step 4
above.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
Keyless Enter-N-Go), the driver’s seat will move about • The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
2.4 in (60 mm) rearward if the driver’s seat position is
driver’s seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
greater than or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set
or Easy Entry.
position when you place the ignition into the ACC or
RUN position.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
• When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or Entry and Easy Exit position.
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be turned
Keyless Enter-N-Go), the driver’s seat will move to a on and off using the Uconnect威 System, refer to
position 0.3 in (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if the “Uconnect威 Settings ” in “Understanding Your Instrudriver’s seat position is between 0.9 in and 2.7 in (22.7
ment Panel” for further information.
mm and 67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat
will return to its previously set position when you
place the ignition in the ACC or RUN position.
3
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety
catch to the left. The safety catch is located under the
center front edge of the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
Hood Safety Catch
Hood Release Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
CAUTION!
WARNING!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open 8 in (20 cm)
approximately and then drop it. This should secure
both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the
hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
3
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog lights.
Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light and instrument panel light operation.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the
AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the
ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
position.
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect威 System, refer to
“Uconnect威 Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
SmartBeam™ — If Equipped
The SmartBeam™ system provides increased forward
lighting at night by automating high beam control
through the use of a digital camera mounted on the
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headinside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle spelights will come on in the automatic mode.
cific light and automatically switches from high beams to
Headlights On With Wipers (Available with
low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
3
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
• The SmartBeam™ system can be turned on and off
using the Uconnect威 System, refer to “Uconnect威 NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” at or above 20 mph (32 km/h).
for further information.
To Deactivate
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
in car) to manually deactivate the system (normal
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
operation of low beams).
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera
2. Push back on the multifunction lever once again to
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
reactivate the system.
If the windshield or SmartBeam™ mirror is replaced, the
SmartBeam™ mirror must be re-aimed to ensure proper Headlight Time Delay
performance. See your local authorized dealer.
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an
To Activate
unlit area.
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight
position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch
while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the
headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins
when the headlight switch is turned off.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
The Daytime Running Lights will turn On the first time
the vehicle is shifted out of PARK, and remain On unless
the Parking Brake is applied. Upon returning to the
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds PARK position, the DRLs will turn Off. DRLs will turn
Off when the ignition is switched OFF.
of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.
If you turn the headlights, park lights or ignition switch NOTE: The Daytime Running Lights can be turned on
and off using the Uconnect威 System, refer to “Uconnect威
ON again, the system will cancel the delay.
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
further information.
turn off in the normal manner.
Lights-On Reminder
NOTE: The Headlight Time Delay is programmable using theUconnect威 System, refer to “Uconnect威 Settings” If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver
when the driver’s door is opened.
information.
3
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and press the
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight
headlight
switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either
switch.
press the headlight switch a second time or turn off the
headlight switch.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Multifunction Lever
Fog Light Switch
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
NOTE:
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the EVIC
(if equipped) and a continuous chime will sound if the
vehicle is driven more than 1 mi (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Multifunction Lever
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
three times then automatically turn off.
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
Turn Signals
3
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
High/Low Beam Switch
Front Map/Reading Lights
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overthe headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever head console.
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is
released.
NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-to
pass position for more than 15 seconds, the high beams
will shut off.
Front Map/Reading Lights
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch on either
side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night
time visibility. To turn the lights off, press the switch a
second time. The lights will also turn on when the
UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) is
pressed.
Courtesy Lights
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, press the lens a
second time.
3
Courtesy Lights
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Ambient Light
Interior Lights
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibilTo protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
ity of the floor center console and PRNDL area.
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the
interior lights were switched on manually or are on
because a door is open. This includes the glove box light,
but not the trunk light. To restore interior light operation,
either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light
switch.
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is
located on the left side of the instrument panel.
Ambient Light
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
3
Dimmer Controls
Instrument Panel Dimmer
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the left Dome Light Position
dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of
Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the
the instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders (if second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
equipped).
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the left dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF
position. The interior lights will remain off when the
doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent.
This feature brightens all text displays such as the
odometer, EVIC (if equipped), and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers
and washer when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN Intermittent Wiper System
or ACC position. The multifunction lever is located on Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
the left side of the steering column.
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent position, and then turn the
end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
are five delay settings, which allow you to regulate the
wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second
to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between
cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when
the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
detent, past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent
settings for high-speed wiper operation.
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” position before turning off the engine. If the wiper
switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the
windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur
when the vehicle is restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward
(toward the steering column) and hold it for as long as
washer spray is desired.
3
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper
control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for
two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume
the intermittent interval previously selected.
Mist Feature
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist
position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road
mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is continue to operate until you release the multifunction
turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles lever.
and then turn off.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
WARNING!
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield spray the windshield with washer fluid.
could lead to a collision. You might not see other Headlights On With Wipers (Available with
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of Automatic Headlights Only)
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
windshield washer use.
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be NOTE:
turned on or off using the Uconnect威 System, refer to
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
“Uconnect威 Settings” in “Understanding Your Instruwiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
ment Panel” for further information.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
windshield.
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray • Use of Rain-X威 or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensitive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less
wiper sensitivity. Setting 4 can be used if the driver
desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the
OFF position when not using the system.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
3
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Transmission in NEUTRAL Position — When the
ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift lever is
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
NOTE: Rain Sensing can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect威 System, refer to “Uconnect威 Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of
the steering column.
Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle
down. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
column in position, push the control handle up until fully
engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
— IF EQUIPPED
3
Power Tilt/Telescoping Switch
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping desired.
steering column lever is located below the multifunction
lever on the steering column.
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat,
you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel
to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to preprogrammed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”
in this section.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for
approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically
shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early
or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already
warm.
The heated steering wheel can be turned on and off using
the Uconnect威 System.
Touch the “Controls” soft-key then touch the “Heated
Steering Wheel” soft-key to turn on the heated steering
wheel. Press the “Heated Steering Wheel” soft-key a
second time to turn the heated steering wheel off.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
3
Controls Soft-Key
Heated Steering Wheel Soft-Key
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
— If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
Vehicle” for further information.
greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
seat position. This feature allows the brake, accelerator,
WARNING!
and clutch pedals (if equipped) to move toward or away
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin from the driver to provide improved position with the
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, steering wheel.
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
The switch is located on the front side of the driver’s seat
cushion side shield.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control System is on. The following messages will be displayed on
vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information System (EVIC) if the pedals are attempted to be
adjusted when the system is locked out (“Adjustable
Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or “Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”).
NOTE:
• Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full
pedal travel.
Adjustable Pedals Switch
Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward
(toward the front of the vehicle).
Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward
(toward the driver).
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
• Further small adjustments may be necessary to find
the best possible seat/pedal position.
3
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat,
you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel
to return the adjustable pedals to pre-programmed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator light in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will
illuminate. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF
button a second time. The Cruise Indicator light will turn
off. The system should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF
4 — CANCEL
2 — RES +
3 — SET -
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
3
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF
button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
speed memory.
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will To Resume Speed
operate at the selected speed.
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
NOTE:
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
• The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and
To Vary The Speed Setting
on level ground before pressing the SET button.
To Set A Desired Speed
• The Electronic Speed Control may not engage if a When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can indifferent size tire is installed on one wheel, such as the crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button
is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to
compact spare tire (if equipped).
increase until the button is released, then the new set
To Deactivate
speed will be established.
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
(1.6 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
decrease until the button is released. Release the button
when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed
will be established.
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
3
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
sensor designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
preset following distance, while matching the speed of
the vehicle ahead.
WARNING!
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
• The ACC system:
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
WARNING! (Continued)
– Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped
vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
– Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
– Does not predict the lane curvature or the movement of preceding vehicles and will not compensate for such changes.
– Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
– Can only apply a maximum of 25% of the vehicle’s braking capability, and will not bring the
vehicle to a complete stop.
WARNING!
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (e.g.,
in highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snowcovered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
appropriate distance between vehicles.
3
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Normal (fixed speed) cruise control mode is for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional information, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
Mode” in this section.
NOTE: The system will not react to preceding vehicles.
Always be aware of the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently.
Always confirm which mode is selected.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
1 — DISTANCE SETTING
2
3
4
5
6
—
—
—
—
—
RES +
SET CANCEL
ON/OFF
MODE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension modifications to the ve- NOTE: You cannot enable ACC under the following
hicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise conditions:
Control.
• When you apply the brakes.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
• When the parking brake is set.
You can only activate ACC if the vehicle speed is above
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, RE20 mph (32 km/h).
VERSE or NEUTRAL.
When the system is turned on and in the READY state,
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) dis- • When pushing the RES + button without a previously
set speed in memory.
plays “Adaptive Cruise Ready.”
When the system is OFF, the EVIC displays “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
3
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To turn the system OFF, push and release the ON/OFF
Push and release the ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in button again. At this time, the system will turn off and
the EVIC will display “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
the EVIC displays “Adaptive Cruise Ready.”
To Activate
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) OFF
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system
on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you
want. You could lose control and have a collision.
Always leave the system off when you are not using
it.
3
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET - button and release. The EVIC will display the set
speed.
ACC Set
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the EVIC.
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The system will not be controlling the distance be- To Cancel
tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle The system will disable ACC without erasing the
speed will only be determined by the position of the memory if:
accelerator pedal.
• You softly tap the brake pedal.
• You depress the brake pedal.
• You press the CANCEL switch.
• The vehicle speed goes below 15 mph (25 km/h)
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
• The transmission is shifted into NEUTRAL.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
Driver Override
NOTE: If ACC is resumed or set with the ESC/TCS off,
ESC will automatically be re-engaged.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
To Resume Speed
Press the RES + button and release. Then remove your
foot from the accelerator pedal. The EVIC will display the
last set speed.
NOTE: You can resume ACC from a minimum of
18 mph (30 km/h).
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Cancelled
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
• You push and release the ON/OFF button.
• You turn OFF the ignition.
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
3
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
pressing and holding the RES + button. If the button is
continually pressed, the set speed will continue to in- NOTE:
crease in 5 mph (8 km/h) increments until the button is
• When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
display.
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
Pressing the RES + button once will result in a 1 mph
will automatically slow the vehicle.
(1.6 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
• The ACC system can only apply a maximum of 25% of
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
the vehicle’s braking capability and will not bring the
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
vehicle to a complete stop.
pressing and holding the SET - button. If the button is
continually pressed, the set speed will continue to de- • The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
crease in 5 mph (8 km/h) increments until the button is
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the
may occur while climbing uphill or descending downEVIC display.
hill. This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed.
To Vary The Speed Setting
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between 3 (long), 2 (medium), and 1 (short). Using this distance setting and the
vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to the
vehicle ahead. This distance setting displays in the EVIC.
3
Distance Set 2 (medium)
Distance Set 3 (long)
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
same lane, the EVIC displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of
the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
speed.
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
• The vehicle ahead slows to a speed below 15 mph
(24 km/h) and the system automatically disengages
itself.
To change the distance setting, press the Distance button
and release. Each time the button is pressed, the distance
• The distance setting is changed.
setting adjusts between 3 (long), 2 (medium), and 1
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
(short).
ACC Activation).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
Distance Set 1 (short)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE” will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity. When this occurs, you should immediately
apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle ahead.
3
Brake Alert 3
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Brake Alert 2
Brake Alert 1
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings. The
EVIC is located in the upper part of the instrument
cluster between the speedometer and the tachometer. The
information it displays depends on ACC system status.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “ACC” • The set speed will continue to display in place of the
or “Cruise” is highlighted in the EVIC. Status of the ACC
odometer reading when changing the EVIC display
or Cruise is also displayed in the menu line.
while ACC is set.
Press and release the SELECT (right arrow) button to The ACC screen will display once again if any ACC
display the following information:
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
• Set Speed Change
• When ACC is deactivated, the display will read •
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
•
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
•
• When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting
has not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive •
Cruise Control Ready.”
•
ACC SET
•
• When ACC is set, the set speed will display.
Distance Setting Change
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
• The EVIC will return to the last display selected after
five seconds of no ACC display activity.
3
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the ACC “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of
Vehicle” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
“Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” Warning
Control is still available. For additional information refer
The ACC “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
warning will display when conditions temporarily limit section.
system performance. This most often occurs at times of
poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
system may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
EVIC will display “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of vehicle behind the lower grille.
Vehicle” and the system will deactivate.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is imporThe “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” message tant to note the following maintenance items:
Display Warnings And Maintenance
can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly • Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage
snow). The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has
the sensor lens.
left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
warning may temporarily occur.
require a sensor realignment.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
• If the sensor is damaged due to a collision, see your temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
authorized dealer for service.
conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If this
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
occurs, try activating ACC again later, following a key
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE: Installing a vehicle front-end protector or an
aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recommended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC
operation.
ACC Unavailable Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) Unavailable”, there may be a
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Unavailable Warning
3
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
Adding A Trailer Hitch
The weight of a trailer/hitch may affect the performance
of ACC. If there is a noticeable change in performance
following the installation of a trailer/hitch, or if the ACC
performance does not return to normal after removing
the trailer/hitch see your authorized dealer.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel. There will not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle
may move in and out of the line of travel, which can
cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Turns And Bends
In turns or bends, ACC may detect a vehicle ahead too
late or too early. This may cause your vehicle to brake late
or unexpectedly. Give extra attention in curves and be
ready to apply the brakes if necessary. Be sure to select an
appropriate speed while driving in curves.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.
ACC may occasionally provide braking and/or a driver
alert that you consider unnecessary. This may be the
system’s response to signs, guardrails, and other stationary objects in a curve. This may also occur at the base of
steep hills. This is normal operation and your vehicle
does not require service.
3
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lane Changing
ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC will not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There will not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There will not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
3
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
General Information
FCC Requirements For Vehicular Radar Systems
Classification Specifications:
47 C.F.R. Part 15
47 C.F.R Part 15.515
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a normal
(fixed speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruising at fixed speeds. The normal Cruise Control mode is
designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Cruise Control
can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
To change modes, press the MODE button when the
system is in either the OFF, READY, or SET position.
While pressing the mode button, a chime alerts the driver
to the change of state from Adaptive Cruise Control to
normal Cruise Control. “Cruise Ready” will be displayed
if the system was in ACC READY or ACC SET position.
“Cruise Off” will be displayed if the system was in the
ACC OFF position. To switch back to Adaptive Cruise
Control mode, press the MODE button a second time.
WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, press the
SET - button and release. The EVIC will display the set
speed.
NOTE: You must observe the display when setting or
changing speed, not the speedometer.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Resume
There are two ways to change the set speed:
Press the RES + button and then remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. The EVIC will display the last set
• Use the accelerator pedal to adjust the vehicle to the
speed.
desired speed and press the SET - button.
To Turn Off
• Tap the RES + or SET - button to increase or decrease
the set speed in 1 mph (1.6 km/h) increments respec- The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
tively. Hold the RES + or SET - button for 5 mph memory if:
(8 km/h) increments.
• You push and release the ON/OFF button.
To Cancel
• You turn off the ignition.
The system will disable normal Cruise Control without
• You switch off ESC.
erasing the memory if:
If the Cruise Control system is turned off and reactivated,
• You softly tap or depress the brake pedal.
the system will return to the last driver setting (ACC or
• You press the CANCEL button.
Normal Cruise Control).
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
3
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system provides
the driver with audible and visual warnings (within the
EVIC) when it detects a potential frontal collision. The
warnings are intended to provide the driver with enough
time to react and avoid the potential collision.
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
sensor as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC),
wheel speed sensors, i.e., to calculate a probable rear-end
collision. When the system determines that a rear-end
collision is probable a warning message (both audible
and visual) will be displayed on the EVIC. When the
system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of
you is no longer probable, the warning message will be
deactivated.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
Changing FCW Status
The FCW feature can be set to far, set to near or turned off
using the Uconnect威 System, refer to “Uconnect威 Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information. The FCW Status Off, Near or Far will
be displayed in the Uconnect威 display.
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting, this allows
NOTE: The minimum speed for FCW activation is
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
10 mph (16 km/h).
vehicle in front of you when you are farther away. This
gives you the most reaction time.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows • The system will retain the last setting selected by the
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
driver after ignition shut down.
vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This
• FCW will not react to irrelevant objects such as oversetting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting,
head objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
of the car, stationary objects that are far away, oncomChanging the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system
ing traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or higher
from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle
rate of speed.
in front of you.
• If the FCW becomes disabled then a warning will
NOTE:
display on the EVIC screen.
• In the “Off” setting FCW OFF will be displayed on the
Uconnect威 display.
3
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
FCW Unavailable Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
FCW Unavailable, Service Required”, there may be a
temporary malfunction that limits FCW functionality.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, FCW will be temporarily unavailable. If this
occurs, try activating FCW again later, following a key
cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
ACC/FCW Unavailable, Service Required Warning
PARKSENSE姞 REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
during a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense威 System obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
Usage Precautions” for limitations of this system and (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientarecommendations.
tion of the obstacle.
ParkSense威 will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is ParkSense姞 Warning Display
changed to the ON/RUN position.
The ParkSense威 Warning screen will only be displayed if
ParkSense威 can be active only when the shift lever is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense威 is enabled at this shift lever
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect威 System. Refer to “Uconnect威 Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense威 Warning screen is located within the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). It provides
visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Settings” in
ParkSense姞 Sensors
Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inforThe four ParkSense威 sensors, located in the rear fascia/
mation.
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
3
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense姞 Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
will turn ON indicating the system status.
Park Assist System Off
Park Assist Ready
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone.
As the vehicle moves closer to the object, the EVIC
display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will
change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271
3
Slow Tone
Fast Tone
272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Continuous Tone
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
Arcs
Greater than
59 in (150 cm)
None
None
WARNING ALERTS
59-39 in
39-25 in
(150-100 cm)
(100-65 cm)
Single 1/2Slow
Second Tone
3 Solid
3 Slow
(Continuous)
Flashing
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense姞
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Fast
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Continuous
2 Slow
Flashing
1 Slow
Flashing
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE
and the system is disabled, the EVIC will display the
“PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE at or below 7 mph (11 km/h).
ParkSense威 can be enabled and disabled using the
Uconnect威 System. The available choices are: Off, Sound
Only, or Sound and Display. Refer to “Uconnect威 Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Service The ParkSense姞 Rear Park Assist System
When the ParkSense威 soft-key is pressed to disable the
system, the EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for approximately five seconds.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
When the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist system is malfunctioning, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) will actuate a single chime, once per ignition
cycle, and it will display the “CLEAN PARK ASSIST”,
3
274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
“SERVICE PARK ASSIST” or the “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the
shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has
detected a fault condition, the EVIC “PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense威 will not
operate.
Cleaning The ParkSense姞 System
Clean the ParkSense威 sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
ParkSense姞 System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
If “CLEAN PARK ASSIST” appears in the Electronic
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense威 system operatVehicle Information Center (EVIC) make sure the outer
ing properly.
surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper is
clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruc- • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense威.
tion and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues
to appear see an authorized dealer.
• When you turn ParkSense威 off, the EVIC will display
If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST” or “SERVICE PARK ASSIST
“PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF.” Furthermore, once you
SYSTEM” appears in the EVIC, see an authorized dealer.
turn ParkSense威 off, it remains off until you turn it on
again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense威 is turned off, the EVIC will
display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for
as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• Clean the ParkSense威 sensors regularly, taking care not
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense威 system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the
fascia/bumper.
• Objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.,
must not be placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do
so can result in the system misinterpreting a close
object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE
PARK ASSIST” message to be displayed in the EVIC.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense威 is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense威 in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense威.
3
276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the Rear Park Assist system. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals,
other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
• Before using the Rear Park Assist system, it is
strongly recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to
vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be
much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia
when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone.
Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the vehicle.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277
PARKVIEW姞 REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView威 Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of
the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
The ParkView威 camera is located on the rear of the
vehicle above the rear License plate.
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen
appears again.
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width
of the vehicle the static grid lines will show separate
zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the
vehicle.The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone:
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
3
278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView威 Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView威 should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView威 camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView威 to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView威.
NOTE:If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279
Turning ParkView姞 On Or Off — With Touch
Screen Radio
1. Turn the Radio on.
2. Press the “More” soft-key.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door
Opener (HomeLink威) and power sunroof switches may
also be included, if equipped.
3. Press the “Settings” soft-key.
4. Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance” soft-key.
5. Press the check box soft key next to “Parkview威
Backup Camera” to enable/disable.
Overhead Console
3
280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To turn the lights off, press the switch a second time. The
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will
can be turned on by pressing the switch on either side of also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is
pressed.
the console. These buttons are backlit for night time
visibility.
Courtesy Lights
Front Map/Reading Lights
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, press the lens a
second time.
Front Map/Reading Lights
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281
3
Courtesy Lights
Sunglasses Bin Door
Sunglasses Bin Door
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
At the front of the console a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compartment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome
pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the
door to close.
HomeLink威 replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink威 unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The HomeLink威 buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different HomeLink威 channels.The HomeLink威 indicator is
located above the center button.
HomeLink威 Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
HomeLink威 Buttons/Overhead Consoles
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink姞
NOTE:
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage • Erasing all channels should only be performed when
before you begin programming.
programming HomeLink威 for the first time. Do not
erase
channels when programming additional buttons.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that • If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink威
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
system.
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink威
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
3
284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in
view.
Firmly press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink威 NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
button you want to program and the hand-held trans- step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
mitter button.
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indiseconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
cator light. The HomeLink威 indicator will flash slowly
activates, programming is complete.
and then rapidly after HomeLink威 has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. ReNOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not actilease both buttons after the indicator light changes
vate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to
from slow to rapid.
complete the training.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is erase the channels.
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
3
286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to proTo reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
gram while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in
follow these steps:
view.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink威
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
button you want to program and the hand-held transthe indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
mitter button.
not release the button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programcator light. The Homelink威 indicator will flash slowly
ming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining
and then rapidly after HomeLink威 has received the
steps.
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
from slow to rapid.
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink威 button
before 1995.
and observe the indicator light.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink威 button is pressed.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287
• To program the two remaining HomeLink威 buttons, Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
erase the channels.
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transfollow these steps:
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink威
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do time-out in the same manner.
not release the button.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
ming A Non-Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all door or gate motor.
remaining steps.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
3
288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in
view.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink威 button is pressed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink威 buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink威 has If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi- programming, plug it back in at this time.
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button
fully trained.
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
4. Watch for the HomeLink威 indicator to change flash
follow these steps:
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
door may open and close while you are programming.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink威 button
not release the button.
and observe the indicator light.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289
3. Without releasing the button proceed with The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
follow all remaining steps.
Troubleshooting Tips
Using HomeLink姞
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
To operate, press and release the programmed are some of the most common solutions:
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the • Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitprogrammed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operater.
tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may • Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
also be used at any time.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
Security
remember to plug it back in?
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
in your vehicle.
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
3
290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515
or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for
safety information or assistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switch
WARNING!
• Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch (or with the ignition in the
Accessory or Run position, for vehicles equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go™). Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the power
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
3
292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
second and the sunroof will open automatically from any
the sunroof.
position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During Express Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
will stop the sunroof.
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the forward again.
Opening Sunroof — Express
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially Pinch Protect Feature
opened condition until the switch is pushed and held
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
rearward again.
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obClosing Sunroof — Express
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstrucsecond and the sunroof will close automatically from any tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 293
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt
will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect
disabled.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Press and release the Vent button within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the Sunroof Maintenance
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is the glass panel.
open.
3
294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Ignition Off Operation
Sunroof Fully Closed
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power sunroof switch
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch
is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature.
Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
sunroof is fully closed.
NOTE:
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power
sunroof switch will remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned
to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will
cancel this feature.
• The Ignition Off time is programmable using the
Uconnect威 System. Refer to “Uconnect威 Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There are three 12 Volt (13 Amps) electrical power outlets
on this vehicle. The power outlets are protected by a fuse.
Insert a cigar lighter or accessory plug into the power
outlets for use to ensure proper operation.
NOTE: To ensure proper operation, a MOPAR威 knob
and element must be used.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 295
CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
The front 12 Volt power outlet has power available only
when the ignition is placed in the ACC or RUN position.
3
Front Power Outlet
WARNING!
Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on
the center console on vehicles not equipped with the
ash receiver tray. A fire leading to bodily injury could
result.
296 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The center console outlet is powered directly from the
battery (power available at all times). Items plugged into
this outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
There is also a 12 volt power outlet located on the back of
the center console for rear passengers. This power outlet
has power available only when the ignition is placed in
the ACC or RUN position.
Center Console Power Outlet
Rear Center Console Power Outlet
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 297
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — #12 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel &
Power Outlet Console Rear
2 — #38 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest
3
298 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 299
CUPHOLDERS
Front Seat Cupholders
The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the
center console.
3
Front Cupholders
Retractable Cover
300 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press the “Cold” symbol once to turn on the cupholder;
Your vehicle may be equipped with heated and cooled press the symbol a second time to turn the cupholder off.
cupholders. The cupholders are designed to help keep Press the “Hot” symbol once to activate the cupholder;
press the symbol a second time to turn off the cupholder.
warm beverages warm and cold beverages cool.
Heated and Cooled Cupholders — If Equipped
WARNING!
Heated And Cooled Cupholder Switches
When using the cupholder in the “Hot” position,
avoid contact with the heated portion of the cupholder in order to reduce the possibility of burns.
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injuries, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise particular care in order to prevent serious burn injury.
Keep the cupholder free of debris or stray objects
when operated in the Heat position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 301
Rear Seat Cupholders
Lighted Cupholders — If Equipped
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining a resting place for the rear occupant’s elbows.
On some vehicles the rear cupholders are equipped with
a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the rear
passengers. The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer
Control. Refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Rear Seat Cupholders
Light Ring In Rear Cupholder
3
302 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
STORAGE
Glovebox Storage
The glovebox storage compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel.
Opened Glovebox Storage Compartment
Console Features
There is an open cubby bin located forward of the shift
lever.
Glovebox Storage Compartment
Two separate storage compartments are also located
underneath the center console armrest.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 303
integrated coin holder, along with additional area for
small items like an ipod or phone. Below the upper tray,
the lower storage compartment is made for larger items,
like CDs and tissue boxes. In addition, the 12 volt power
outlet, USB and Aux jack are located here.
WARNING!
Center Console
Inside the center console armrest, there is a removable
upper storage tray that can be slid forward/rearward on
rails for access to the lower storage area. This tray has an
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music
players, and other handheld electronic devices
should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices
while driving can cause an accident due to distraction, resulting in death or injury.
3
304 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Door Storage
The door panels contain storage areas.
Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped with 60/40
Split-Folding Rear Seat
The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying
versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling
nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When
the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous,
nearly-flat extension of the load floor.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
Front Door Trim Storage
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 305
WARNING!
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of
the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
collision.
(Continued)
3
306 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control. Press this button to turn on the
rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10
minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation,
press the button a second time.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 307
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers
The automatic load leveling system will provide a level- raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes
riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling
to complete depending on road surface conditions.
conditions.
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15
hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The
vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
3
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .311
▫ EVIC Red Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
▫ Oil Change Due . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM . . . . . . .313
▫ Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .314
▫ Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
▫ Trip Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
▫ EVIC White Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
▫ EVIC Amber Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
▫ Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
▫ Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features) . .336
▫ Messages # . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
▫ Turn Menu OFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
4
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 Uconnect威 SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337 䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Hard-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Soft-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect威 4.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338 䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . .
. . . .368
. . . .368
. . . .369
. . . .369
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Uconnect威 8.4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 iPod威/USB/MP3 CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
▫ General Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 HARMAN KARDON威 Logic7威 HIGH
▫ Hard-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PERFORMANCE MULTICHANNEL SURROUND
SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE
▫ Soft-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SURROUND (DSS) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .366
▫ Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. .370
. .370
. .370
. .370
. .372
. .377
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .379
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
— Air Outlet
— Instrument Cluster
— Hazard Switch
— Uconnect威 System
— Climate Control Hard Controls
— Glove Compartment
7 — ESC Off Switch
8 — Uconnect威 System Hard Controls
9 — SD Memory Card Slot
10 — Power Outlet
11 — CD/DVD Slot
12 — Storage Compartment
13
14
15
16
17
—
—
—
—
—
Engine Start/Stop Button
Trunk Release Button
Dimmer Controls
Hood Release
Headlight Switch
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM
4
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on, a
1. Tachometer
continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the
This gauge measures engine revolutions-per-minute signals off. If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
(RPM x 1000).
for a defective outside light bulb.
2. AWD (All Wheel Drive) Indicator — If Equipped
5. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
The AWD indicator will illuminate when All Wheel Drive
(AWD) is activated.
3. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on.
4. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated.
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
6. High Beam Indicator
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction lever forward to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull
toward yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
7. Odometer Display /Electronic Vehicle Information Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
Center (EVIC) Display
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the
Odometer Display
instrument cluster. For further information, refer to
The odometer display shows the total distance the ve“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.
hicle has been driven.
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
EVIC display. It displays the gear position of the autovehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
matic transmission.
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair NOTE:
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
You must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK.
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must The highest available transmission gear is displayed in
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was the lower right corner of the Electronic Vehicle Informabefore the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to tion Center (EVIC) whenever the Electronic Range Select
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/ (ERS) feature is active. Use the +/- selector on the shift
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or lever to activate ERS. Refer to “Automatic Transmission”
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
must be reset at zero.
4
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
8. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If Equipped
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the 9. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
an onboard diagnostic system, called OBD, that
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
monitors engine and automatic transmission conreplacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
to continue to function properly.
the ON/RUN position, before engine start. If the bulb
CAUTION!
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and Certain conditions, such as poor fuel quality, etc., may
warning have been established for the tire size illuminate the MIL after engine start. The vehicle should
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera- be serviced if the light stays on through several of your
tion or sensor damage may result when using re- typical driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will
placement equipment that is not of the same size, drive normally and will not require towing.
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
4
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
10. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
11. Fuel Door Reminder
The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the
Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the
vehicle.
12. Fuel Gauge
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
13. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” 15. Sport Mode — If Equipped
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
This light will illuminate when the sport mode
further information.
is selected. This mode provides performance
14. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
based tuning. For further information, refer to
”Sport Mode” in “Starting And Operating” .
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition 16. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximay stay on for as long as four seconds.
mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
until the vehicle is disarmed.
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
17. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
Light — If Equipped
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
This light indicates the Electronic Stability ConIf the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
trol (ESC) is off.
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
4
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
18. Brake Warning Light
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
19. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
4
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
21. Seat Belt Reminder Light
The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/
RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if
the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound.
After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat
belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will illuminate and the chime will sound. Refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC
system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that
caused the ESC activation.
20. O/D (Overdrive) OFF Indicator Light
22. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperaThis light will illuminate when the O/D OFF ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
button has been selected and overdrive has been the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
turned off.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
4
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful
information by pressing the switches mounted on the
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea- steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the following:
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the • Radio Info
instrument cluster.
• Fuel Economy
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
• Vehicle Speed
• Trip Info
• Tire Pressure
• Vehicle Info (Stored Warning Messages)
• Turn Menu OFF
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
The system allows the driver to select information by UP Button
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
Press and release the UP button to scroll upwheel:
ward through the main menu and Vehicle Info
and Trip Info sub-menus (Fuel Economy, Vehicle Info, Tire PSI, Cruise, Messages, Trip Info,
Vehicle Speed, and Turn Menu OFF) and sub-menus.
DOWN Button
Press and release the DOWN button to scroll
downward through the main menu and Vehicle
Info and Trip Info sub-menus (Fuel Economy,
Vehicle Info, Tire PSI, Cruise, Messages, Trip
Info, Vehicle Speed, and Turn Menu OFF) and
sub-menus.
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
4
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SELECT Button
Press and release the SELECT button for access
to main menus, sub-menus or to select a personal setting in the setup menu. Press and hold
the SELECT button for two seconds to reset
features.
2. The main display area where the menus and pop up
messages are displayed.
3. The reconfigurable telltales section.
The main display area will normally display the main
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
menu. The main display area also displays ⬙pop up⬙
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warnBACK Button
ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall
Press the BACK button to scroll back to a
into several categories:
previous menu or sub-menu.
• Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
message takes control of the main display area for five
Displays
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
The EVIC display consists of three sections:
condition that activated it remains active) and can be
1. The top line where compass direction and outside reviewed from the ⬙Messages⬙ main menu item. As long
temperature are displayed.
as there is a stored message, an ⬙i⬙ will be displayed in the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
EVIC’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this and then returns to the previous screen. Examples of this
message type are ⬙Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out⬙ message type are ⬙Memory System Unavailable - Not in
Park⬙ and ⬙Automatic High Beams On⬙.
and ⬙Low Tire Pressure⬙.
• Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
of this message type are ⬙Turn Signal On⬙ (if a turn signal
is left on) and ⬙Lights On⬙ (if driver leaves the vehicle).
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the
middle, and red telltales on the left.
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are
⬙Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar⬙ and ⬙Press Brake
Pedal and Push Button to Start⬙.
This area will show reconfigurable white caution telltales. These telltales include:
EVIC White Telltale Lights
• Shift Lever Status
The shift lever status “P,R,N,D,L,6,5,4,3,2,1” are displayed indicating the shift lever position. Telltales
“6,5,4,3,2,1” indicate the Electronic Range Select (ERS)
feature has been engaged and the gear selected is dis• Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of mes- played. For further information on ERS, refer to “Starting
sage takes control of the main display area for five seconds And Operating”
4
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Electronic Speed Control ON
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is ON. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
• Electronic Speed Control SET
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) SET
This light will turn on when the ACC is SET.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
EVIC Amber Telltales
This light will turn on when the electronic This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tellspeed control is SET. For further information, tales. These telltales include:
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under- • Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
This telltale informs the driver that the For• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON
ward Collision Warning feature is Off. The
telltale is On when the front radar sensor is
This light will turn on when the ACC is ON.
blocked and requires cleaning, the ACC/FCW
For further information, refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The sensors require service, or the ACC/FCW system is
unavailable because of a system error. For further inforFeatures Of Your Vehicle.”
mation, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
• Low Fuel Telltale
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
• SERV AWD (Service All Wheel Drive) Indicator
This light will turn on when the All Wheel
Drive feature requires service. For further information, refer to “All Wheel Drive” in “Starting And Operating.”
EVIC Red Telltale Lights
This telltale will turn on to indicate the windThis area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These
shield washer fluid is low.
telltales include:
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Malfunction
• Door Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
This light will turn on when a ACC is not
more doors may be ajar.
operating and needs service. For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of • Trunk Ajar
Your Vehicle.”
This light will turn on to indicate that the trunk
may be ajar.
4
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Oil Pressure Warning Light
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authoThis light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the
rized dealer.
light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off
the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound for • If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
four minutes when this light turns on.
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
• Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. • Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
This light informs you of a problem with the
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
light will come on when the ignition is first
• Charging System Light
cycled ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
This light shows the status of the electrical chargcheck. If the light does not come on during starting, have
ing system. The light should come on when the
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
ignition is first cycled ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light stays on or comes on while driving, • If a problem is detected, the light will come on while
the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential electrical
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If the
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
charging system light remains on, it means that the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
• If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the
light is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is required. You may experience reduced
performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall
and your vehicle may require towing.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
• Engine Temperature Warning Light
• Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid
This light warns of an overheated engine conditemperature is running hot. This may occur
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H, or 260°F, this indicator will illuminate and a
with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this
light turns on, safely pull over and stop the
single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and
pass H, or 260°F, the indicator will continuously flash run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.
and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is
allowed to cool.
4
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle,
in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to
boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
Oil Change Due
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will
flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds
after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, press and release the
MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system
(after performing the scheduled maintenance), perform
the following procedure:
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (Do not start the engine.)
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
3. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE Press the UP/DOWN buttons to cycle through all the
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the Trip Computer functions.
OFF/LOCK position.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following informaNOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you tion:
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
4
Fuel Economy
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Fuel
Economy” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press
the SELECT button. Press and release the UP/DOWN
buttons until one of the following Fuel Economy functions displays in the EVIC:
• Average Fuel Economy/Fuel Saver Mode
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
• Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
Fuel Economy
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Average Fuel Economy / ECO Fuel Saver Mode —
If Equipped
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
continue from the last fuel average reading before the
reset.
There is an ECO icon between the Compass and Outside
Temperature info at the top of the EVIC display. This icon
will appear whenever the Multi-Displacement System
(MDS) (if equipped) allows the engine to operate on four
cylinders, or if you are driving in a fuel efficient manner.
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT
button.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a “LOW FUEL” message. This display will continue
This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant
in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to modify amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
FUEL” message and a new DTE value will display.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
Trip Info
The Miles Per Gallon (MPG) feature displays instanta- Trip A
neous fuel economy in a bar graph below the DTE, this
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
function cannot be reset. Press the BACK button to return
reset.
to the main menu.
Trip B
Vehicle Speed
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
reset.
Speed” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the
SELECT button. Press the SELECT button to display the Elapsed Time
current speed in mph or km/h. Pressing the SELECT Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
button a second time will toggle the unit of measure when the ignition is in the ACC position. Elapsed time
between mph or km/h.
will increment when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
NOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle position.
Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the
EVIC.
4
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To Reset The Display
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
displayed. Press and release the SELECT button once to
clear the resettable function being displayed. To reset all
resettable functions, press and hold the SELECT button
for two seconds. The current display will reset along with
other functions.
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
Info” displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button.
Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the
available information displays, then press SELECT to
display any one of the following choices.
Units
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Units”
displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT
button. The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if
equipped) can be changed between English and Metric
units of measure. To make your selection, scroll up or
down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then
press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has
been selected.
• Oil Temperature
• Coolant Temp
Displays the actual oil temperature.
• Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
• Trans Temperature
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
• Engine Hours
Turn Menu OFF
Select from Main Menu using the DOWN button. Pressing the SELECT button blanks the menu display. Pressing
• Tire Pressure
any one of the four steering wheel buttons brings the
Shows the actual tire pressure for each tire (EXCLUDING menu back.
THE SPARE TIRE).
Uconnect姞 SETTINGS
Messages #
The Uconnect威 system uses a combination of soft and
Select from Main Menu using the UP or DOWN buttons. hard keys located on the center of the instrument panel
This feature shows the number of stored warning mes- that allows you to access and change the customer
sages (in the # place holder). Pressing the SELECT button programmable features.
will allow you to see what the stored messages are.
Pressing the BACK button takes you back to the Main Hard-Keys
Menu.
Hard-Keys are located on the left and right side of the
Uconnect威 4.3 screen. In addition, there is a Scroll/Enter
control knob located on the right side of the Climate
Controls in the center of the instrument panel. Turn the
control knob to scroll through menus and change settings
Displays the number of hours of engine operation.
4
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
(i.e., 30, 60, 90), press the center of the control knob one or Press the ⬙Settings⬙ hard-key to access the Settings screen,
more times to select or change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF). use the Page Up/Down soft-keys to scroll through the
following settings. Touch the desired setting soft key to
Soft-Keys
change the setting using the description shown on the
Soft-Keys are accessible on the Uconnect威 touch-screen. following pages for each setting.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect姞
4.3 Settings
In this mode the Uconnect威 system allows you to access
programmable features that may be equipped such as
Display, Clock, Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors &
Locks, Heated Seats, Engine Off Operation, Compass
Settings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth and SIRIUS Setup
through hard-keys and soft-keys.
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
1 — Uconnect威 4.3 Settings Hard-Key
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
selecting any point on the scale between the + and –
soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
• Mode
Touch the Mode soft-key to change this display. When in
this display, you may select one of the auto display
settings. To change Mode status press and release the
Day, Night or Auto soft-key, then by touch the arrow back
soft-key.
• Language
Touch the Language soft-key to change this display.
When in this display, you may select one of three
languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
Display
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Touch
• Brightness
the English, French (Français) or Spanish (Español) softTouch the Brightness soft-key to change this display. key to select the language preferred. Then touch the
When in this display, you may select display brightness arrow back soft-key. As you continue, the information
with the headlights on and the headlights off. Adjust the will display in the selected language.
brightness with the + and – setting soft-keys or by
Uconnect威 4.3 Soft-Keys
4
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Units
• Fuel Saver Display
Touch the Units soft-key to change this display. When in
this display, you may switch the EVIC, odometer, and
navigation system (if equipped) between US and Metric
units of measure. Touch US or Metric then touch the
arrow back soft-key. As you continue, the information
will display in the selected units of measure.
Touch the Fuel Saver Display soft-key to turn the “ECO”
message (located in the instrument cluster display) on or
off. To make your selection, touch the Fuel Saver Display
soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrow
back soft-key.
• Voice Response
Clock
• Set Time
Touch the Voice Response soft-key to change the Voice
Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response Touch the Set Time soft-key to change this display. When
Length, press and release the Brief or Long soft-key. Then in this display, you may select the time display settings.
To make your selection, touch the Set Time soft-key,
touch the arrow back soft-key.
adjust the hours and minutes using the up and down
• Touch Screen Beep
soft-keys, select AM or PM, select 12 hr or 24 hr. Then
Touch the Touch Screen Beep soft-key to turn on or shut touch the arrow back soft-key when all selections are
off the sound heard when a touch screen button (softkey) complete.
is pressed. To change the Touch Screen Beep setting press
and release the ON or OFF soft-key, then touch the arrow
back soft-key.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
• Show Time Status
Touch the Show Time Status soft-key to change this
display. When in this display, you may turn on or shut off
the digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show
Time Status setting, press and release the ON or OFF
soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
• Sync Time – If Equipped
status of FCW is the Far setting. This means the system
will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you when you are farther away. This gives you
the most reaction time. To change the setting for more
dynamic driving, select the Near setting. This warns you
of a possible collision when you are much closer to the
vehicle in front of you. This allows for a more dynamic
driving experience. To change the FCW status, press and
release the OFF, Near or Far button. Then touch the arrow
back soft-key.
Touch the Sync Time soft-key to change this display.
When in this display, you may have the radio set the time
automatically. To change the Sync Time setting, press and For further information, refer to ”Adaptive Cruise Conrelease the ON or OFF soft-key. Then touch the arrow trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
back soft-key.
Vehicle”.
Safety / Assistance
• Front Collision Warning — If Equipped
• Park Assist
Touch the Park Assist soft-key to change this display. The
Touch the Front Collision Warning soft-key to change this Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the
display. The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature can vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE
be can be set to Far, set to Near or turned Off. The default and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). The
4
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
system can be enabled with Sound Only, Sound and
Display, or turned OFF. To change the Park Assist status,
press and release the OFF, Sound Only or Sounds and
Display soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
Refer to “ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function
and operating information.
• Tilt Mirrors In Reverse
Touch the Tilt Mirrors In Reverse soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, the outside rearview mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in
the RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in
the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to
their previous position when the transmission is shifted
out of REVERSE. To make your selection, touch the Tilt
Mirrors In Reverse soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then
touch the arrow back soft-key.
• Blind Spot Alert
Touch the Blind Spot Alert soft-key to change this display. When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert
feature can be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The
Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Lights”
mode. When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual
alert in the outside mirrors. When “Lights & Chime”
mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will
show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an
audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is
selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To change the Blind Spot Alert status, touch the
OFF, Lights or Lights & Chime soft-key. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
• Rain Sensing
Touch the Rain Sensing soft-key to change this display.
When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, touch the
Rain Sensing soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch
the arrow back soft-key.
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
and operating information. To make your selection, touch
the Hill Start Assist soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then
touch the arrow back soft-key.
Lights
• Illuminated Approach
Touch the Illuminated Approach soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, the headlights will
activate and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when
the doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach
status, touch the 0, 30, 60 or 90 soft-key. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key.
• Headlights With Wipers
Touch the Headlights With Wipers soft-key to change this
Touch the Hill Start Assist soft-key to change this display. display. When this feature is selected, and the headlight
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
4
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
on. The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, touch the Headlights With Wipers softkey and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key.
your selection, touch the Daytime Running Lights softkey and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key.
• Steering Directed Lights – If Equipped
Touch the Steering Directed Lights soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, the headlights turn
Touch the Auto High Beams soft-key to change this relative to a change in direction of the steering wheel. To
display. When this feature is selected, the high beam make your selection, touch the Steering Directed Lights
headlights will deactivate automatically under certain soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrow
conditions. To make your selection, touch the Auto High back soft-key.
Beams soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the • Flash Lights With Lock
arrow back soft-key. Refer to “Lights/SmartBeam™ — If
Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Touch the Flash Headlights With Lock soft-key to change
this display. When this feature is selected, the headlights
Vehicle” for further information.
will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
• Daytime Running Lights – If Available
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature
Touch the Daytime Running Lights soft-key to change may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock
this display. When this feature is selected, the headlights
will turn on whenever the engine is running. To make
• Auto High Beams “SmartBeams™”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
feature selected. To make your selection, touch the Flash unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitHeadlights With Lock soft-key and select ON or OFF. ter. To make your selection, touch the Flash Lights With
Lock soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the
Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
arrow back soft-key.
Doors & Locks
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
• Auto Unlock On Exit
Touch the Auto Unlock On Exit soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, all doors will
unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission
is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s
door is opened. To make your selection, touch the Auto
Unlock On Exit soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then
touch the arrow back soft-key.
• Flash Lights With Lock
Touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key to
change this display. When this feature is selected, the
horn will sound when the remote start is activated. To
make your selection, touch the Sound Horn With Remote
Start soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key.
• Sound Horn With Lock
Touch the Sounds Horn With Lock soft-key to change this
Touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft-key to change this display. When this feature is selected, the horn will chirp
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
display. When this feature is selected, the front and rear
turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To make your selection,
touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft-key and select ON
or OFF. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
4
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Remote Door Unlock Order
Touch the Remote Door Unlock Order soft-key to change
this display. When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press
is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first
press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
UNLOCK button. When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st
Press is selected, you must press the RKE transmitter
UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected, all of the
doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter
UNLOCK button.
Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is programmed,
touching the handle more than once will only result in
the driver’s door opening. If Unlock Driver Door Only
On 1st Press is selected, once the driver door is opened,
the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to
unlock all the doors (or use the RKE transmitter).
• Memory Linked to FOB
Touch the Memory Linked to FOB soft-key to change this
display. This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and
exiting the vehicle, driver 1 and driver 2 last mode,
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter- settings and presets. To make your selection, touch the
N-Go (Passive Entry) and the EVIC is programmed to Memory Linked to FOB soft-key and select ON or OFF.
Unlock All Doors On 1st Press, all doors will unlock no Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is
grasped. If Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is
programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when
the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the
door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
• Passive Entry (Keyless Enter-N-Go)
driver vented seat will turn on. To make your selection,
touch the Auto Heated Seats soft-key and select ON or
OFF. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
Engine Off Options
• Easy Exit Seats — If Equipped
Touch the Passive Entry soft-key to change this display.
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to press the RKE transmitter lock
or unlock buttons. To make your selection, touch the
Passive Entry soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch
the arrow back soft-key. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
Touch the Easy Exit Seats soft-key to change this display.
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, touch the Easy Exit Seats
soft-key, and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrow
back soft-key. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Heated Seats
• Headlight Off Delay
• Auto Heated Seats
Touch the Headlight Off Delay soft-key to change this
Touch the Auto Heated Seats soft-key to change this display. When this feature is selected, the driver can
display. When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or
4
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To change the Compass Settings
Headlight Off Delay status, touch the 0, 30, 60 or 90 • Variance
soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
Touch the Variance soft-key to change this display. Com• Engine Off Power Delay
pass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North
Touch the Engine Off Power Delay soft-key to change this and Geographic North. To compensate for the differdisplay. When this feature is selected, the power window ences, the variance should be set for the zone where the
switches, radio, Uconnect威 phone system (if equipped), vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set,
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if the compass will automatically compensate for the difequipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to ferences, and provide the most accurate compass head10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening ing.
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
Engine Off Power Delay status, touch the 0 seconds, 45 the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,
seconds, 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft-key. Then touch the Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
arrow back soft-key.
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
calibrate the compass by touching the ON soft-key and
completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free
from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL
indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass
will now function normally.
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and
an environment free from large metallic objects such as
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks,
etc.
Audio
Compass Variance Map
• Calibration
Touch the Calibration soft-key to change this setting. This
compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to
manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new, the
compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display
CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may also
• Equalizer
Touch the Equalizer soft-key to change this display.
When in this display, you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and –
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key.
4
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your mode. To make your selection, press the Surround Sound
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrow
back soft-key.
directly on the desired setting.
• Balance / Fade
Phone / Bluetooth
Touch the Balance / Fade soft-key to change this display. • Paired Devices
When in this display, you may adjust the Balance and This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Fade settings.
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect威 Supplement.
• Speed Adjusted Volume
Touch the Speed Adjusted Volume soft-key to change this
display. This feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted
Volume, press the OFF, 1, 2 or 3 soft-key. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key.
SIRIUS Setup
• Channel Skip
SIRIUS can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
• Surround Sound
your selection, touch the Channel Skip soft-key, select the
Touch the Surround Sound soft-key to change this dis- channels you would like to skip. Then touch the arrow
play. This feature provides simulated surround sound back soft-key.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
• Subscription Info
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SIRIUS Satellite Radio with
your radio. Following the expiration of the free services,
it will be necessary to access the information on the
Subscription Information screen in order to re-subscribe.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect姞
8.4 Settings
Press the More soft-key, then press the Settings soft-key
to display the menu setting screen. In this mode the
Uconnect威 system allows you to access programmable
features that may be equipped such as Display, Clock,
Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On
Touch the Subscription Info soft-key to access the Sub- Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off Operation, Compass
scription Information screen.
Settings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth and SIRIUS Setup.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on time.
the screen or visit the provider online.
When making a selection, press the soft-key to enter the
NOTE: SIRIUS Travel Link is a separate subscription.
desired mode. Once in the desired mode press and
release the preferred setting until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Once the setting is complete press the Back Arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu or press the X
4
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
soft-key to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
Up or Down Arrow soft-keys on the right side of the between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back
screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the soft-key.
available settings.
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
Display
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
After pressing the Display soft-key the following settings the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the + and –
will be available.
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back
• Display Mode
soft-key.
When in this display you may select one of the auto
• Set Language
display settings. To change Mode status, touch and
release the Day, Night or Auto soft-key. Then touch the When in this display, you may select one of three
arrow back soft-key.
languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Touch
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
the Set Language soft-key and then touch the desired
When in this display, you may select the brightness with language soft-key until a check-mark appears next to the
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the + and – language, showing that setting has been selected. Touch
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
• Units
pressed. Touch the Touchscreen Beep soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
When in this display, you may select to have the EVIC,
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed
to return to the previous menu.
between US and Metric units of measure. Touch US or
Metric until a check-mark appears next to the setting, • Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a
• Voice Response Length
designated turn within a programmed route. To make
your selection, touch the Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
When in this display, you may change the Voice ReCluster soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to the
sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
Length, touch the Brief or Detailed soft-key until a
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key • Fuel Saver Display In Cluster
to return to the previous menu.
The “ECO” message is located in the instrument cluster
• Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a touch screen button (soft-key) is
display, this message can be turned on or off. To make
your selection, touch the Fuel Saver Display soft-key,
4
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing hours up or down. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow return to the previous menu or touch the X soft-key to
close out of the settings screen.
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
Clock
• Set Time Minutes
After pressing the Clock soft-key the following settings When in this display, you may adjust the minutes. The
will be available.
Sync with GPS Time soft-key must be unchecked. To
make your selection touch the + or - soft-keys to adjust
• Sync Time With GPS
the minutes up or down. Touch the back arrow soft-key
When in this display, you may automatically have the to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft-key to
radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting touch close out of the settings screen.
the Sync with GPS Time soft-key until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been • Time Format
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the When in this display, you may select the time format
previous menu.
display setting. Touch the Time Format soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting,
• Set Time Hours
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
When in this display, you may adjust the hours. The Sync arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
with GPS Time soft-key must be unchecked. To make
your selection touch the + or - soft-keys to adjust the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
• Show Time In Status Bar
driving, select the Near setting. This warns you of a
possible collision when you are much closer to the
vehicle in front of you. This allows for a more dynamic
driving experience. To change the FCW status, touch and
release the OFF, Near or Far button. Then touch the arrow
back soft-key.
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time
Status setting touch the Show Time in Status Bar soft-key
until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Conto return to the previous menu.
trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Safety / Assistance
Vehicle”.
After pressing the Safety / Assistance soft-key the fol• Park Assist
lowing settings will be available.
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
• Front Collision Sensitivity — If Equipped
the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REThe Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature can be can be VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
set to Far, set to Near or turned Off. The default status of (18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only,
FCW is the Far setting. This means the system will warn Sound and Display, or turned OFF. To change the Park
you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you Assist status, touch and release the OFF, Sound Only or
when you are farther away. This gives you the most Sounds and Display button. Then touch the arrow back
reaction time. To change the setting for more dynamic
4
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
soft-key. Refer to “ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist” in (BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for sys- alert in the outside mirrors. When “Lights & Chime”
mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will
tem function and operating information.
show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an
• Tilt Mirrors In Reverse
audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is
When this feature is selected, the outside sideview mir- selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactirors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN vated. To change the Blind Spot Alert status, touch the
position and the transmission shift lever is in the RE- Off, Lights or Lights & Chime soft-key. Then touch the
VERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their arrow back soft-key.
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
REVERSE. To make your selection, touch the Tilt Mirrors
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
In Reverse soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
• Blind Spot Alert
in the BSM not operating to specification.
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature • ParkView威 Backup Camera
can be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The Blind
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView威 Rear
Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Lights” mode.
Back
Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a
caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the
top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will
disappear. The ParkView威 camera is located on the rear
of the vehicle above the rear License plate. To make your
selection, touch the ParkView威 Backup Camera soft-key,
until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, touch the
Rain Sensing soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
and operating information. To make your selection, touch
the Hill Start Assist soft-key, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
Lights
After pressing the Lights soft-key the following settings
will be available.
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
4
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
touch the + or - soft-key to select your desired time until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu. Refer to “Lights/ Smartprevious menu.
Beam™ — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
• Daytime Running Lights – If Available
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make touch the Daytime Running Lights soft-key, until a
your selection, touch the Headlights With Wipers softkey, check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key return to the previous menu.
to return to the previous menu.
• Steering Directed Lights – If Equipped
• Auto Dim High Beams “SmartBeam™” — If
Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights turn relative
to a change in direction of the steering wheel. To make
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights your selection, touch the Steering Directed Lights softkey,
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
make your selection, touch the Auto High Beams softkey,
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that • Auto Unlock On Exit
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
to return to the previous menu.
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
• Flash Headlights With Lock
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, touch the Auto Unlock
When this feature is selected, the headlights will flash
On Exit soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
selected. To make your selection, touch the Flash Head- • Flash Headlight With Lock
lights with Lock soft-key, until a check-mark appears
When this feature is selected, the headlights will flash
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
whe n the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To make your selection,
menu.
touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft-key, until a checkDoors & Locks
mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has
been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to
After pressing the Doors & Locks soft-key the following
the previous menu.
settings will be available.
4
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Sound Horn With Lock
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, you must press
the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the
passenger’s doors. When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press
is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press
of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft-key, until a checkmark appears next to setting, showing that setting has
been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key
the previous menu.
Fob Unlocks, all doors will unlock no matter which
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is programmed, only the
the remote start is activated. To make your selection, driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is
touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until a grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting Unlocks is programmed touching the handle more than
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to once will only result in the driver’s door opening. If
return to the previous menu.
driver door first is selected, once the driver door is
opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
to unlock all doors (or use RKE transmitter).
When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, only the
driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
• Passive Entry
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
is used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory
Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”
for further information.
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make
your selection, touch the Passive Entry soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N- Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
Go” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”. After pressing the Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
soft-key the following settings will be available.
• Personal Settings Linked To FOB — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, touch the Memory
Linked To FOB soft-key, until a check-mark appears next
to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
4
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will
turn on. To make your selection, touch the Auto Heated
Seats soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect威 phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Power Delay status touch the 0 seconds, 45
Engine Off Options
seconds, 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft-key. Then touch the
After pressing the Engine Off Options soft-key the folarrow back soft-key.
lowing settings will be available.
• Headlight Off Delay
• Easy Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, touch the Easy Exit Seats when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
Delay status touch the + or - soft-key to select your NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
desired time interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,
Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
return to the previous menu.
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
Compass Settings
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
After pressing the Compass Settings soft-key the following settings will be available.
4
• Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences, and provide the most accurate compass
heading.
Compass Variance Map
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Perform Compass Calibration
• Equalizer
Touch the Calibration soft-key to change this setting. This
compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to
manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new, the
compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display
CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may also
calibrate the compass by pressing the ON soft-key and
completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free
from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL
indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass
will now function normally.
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and –
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as touch
directly on the desired setting.
• Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
After pressing the Audio soft-key the following settings
touch the Off, 1, 2 or 3 soft-key. Then touch the arrow
will be available.
back soft-key.
• Balance/Fade
Audio
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and
Fade settings.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
• Music Info Cleanup
• Paired Devices
This feature helps organize music files for optimized This feature shows which phones are paired to the
music navigation. To make your selection, touch the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
Music Info Cleanup soft-key, select On or Off followed by to the Uconnect威 Supplement.
pressing the arrow back soft-key.
SiriusXM™ Setup
• Surround Sound
After pressing the SIRIUS Setup soft-key the following
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode. settings will be available.
To make your selection, touch the Surround Sound • Channel Skip
soft-key, select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow
SiriusXM™ can be programmed to designate a group of
back soft-key.
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
Phone/Bluetooth
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth soft-key the follow- your selection, touch the Channel Skip soft-key, select the
channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the
ing settings will be available.
arrow back soft-key.
4
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Subscription Information
iPod姞/USB/MP3 CONTROL
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM™ Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen in order to resubscribe.
This feature allows an iPod威 or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port.
iPod威 control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威
and iPhone威 devices. Some iPod威 software versions may
not fully support the iPod威 control features. Please visit
Apple’s website for software updates.
Touch the Subscription Info soft-key to access the Sub- For further information, refer to the Uconnect威 User’s
scription Information screen.
Manual.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on HARMAN KARDON姞 Logic7姞 HIGH
PERFORMANCE MULTICHANNEL SURROUND
the screen or visit the provider online.
SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE
NOTE: SiriusXM™ Travel Link is a separate subscrip- SURROUND (DSS) — IF EQUIPPED
tion.
Your vehicle is equipped with a Harman Kardon威 audio
system with GreenEdge™ technology that offers superior
sound quality, higher Sound Pressure Levels (SPL) and
reduced energy consumption. The new system utilizes
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
proprietary amplifier and speaker technologies deliver- AUX input; and is activated through the Electronic
ing substantial increases in component and system effi- Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “DriverSelectable Surround Sound (DSS)” under “Electronic
ciency levels.
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding
The 12 Channel Class D GreenEdge high efficiency
Your Instrument Panel”.
amplifier is governed by a high voltage tracking power
supply and drives a 7.4-channel playback architecture. Selecting “Surround Sound” through the DSS modes
The Harman Kardon威 audio system offers the ability to activates the Harman Kardon威 Logic7威 multichannel
choose Logic 7 surround sound for any audio source. The surround-sound technology in your vehicle. Some audio
GreenEdge high-efficiency speaker designs ensure the will sound better in DSS modes, others in Stereo mode.
system has higher SPL and a dramatic increase in dyWhen in “Surround Sound” mode, balance is set autonamic sound quality. The speakers are tuned for maximatically. Fader control is available in surround mode
mum efficiency and perfectly matched to the amplifier
but should be set to the center position for optimal
output stage ensuring state of the art multi-seat surround
surround performance.
sound processing.
Logic7威 multichannel surround-sound technology delivers an immersive, accurate sound-stage to every seating
position This surround effect is available for audio from
any source - AM/FM/CD/ Satellite Radio or dashboard
4
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
access the switches.
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/
CD/AUX/VES, etc.).
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
The button located in the center of the left-hand control CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro- To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
grammed in the radio preset pushbutton.
precautions:
CD Player
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
surface.
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
wiping from center to edge.
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.
If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
The center button on the left side rocker switch has no
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a 5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the
center button will select the next available CD in the 6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
player.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
4
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect威 (if equipped).
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
system can be operated through either the Automatic
Climate Controls on the instrument panel or through the
Uconnect威 system display.
When the Uconnect威 system is in different modes (Radio,
Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger
temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the
display.
General Overview
Hard-Keys
Hard-keys are located on the left and right side of the
Uconnect威 4.3 screen in the center of the instrument
panel. There are also hard-keys located below the
Uconnect威 touch-screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
4
Uconnect威 4.3 — Hard-key
Automatic Climate Controls — Hard-keys
(ATC System Shown)
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Soft-Keys
Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect威 system screen.
Uconnect威 8.4 Automatic Temperature
Controls — Soft-Keys
Uconnect威 4.3 Manual Temperature
Controls — Soft-keys
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
Button Descriptions
(Applies To Both Hard-keys And Soft-keys)
4. AUTO Operation Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
Press and release to change the current setting, the this function will cause the ATC to switch between
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to Operation” for more information.
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator 5. Front Defrost Button
will turn off.
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
2. A/C Button
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feaPress and release to change the current setting, the ture is ON. Performing this function will cause the ATC
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this to switch into manual mode. The blower speed may
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch increase when Defrost mode is selected. If the front
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off. defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return
the previous setting.
3. Recirculation Button
6. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
indicator illuminates when ON.
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
1. MAX A/C Button
4
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window 7. Rear Climate Button
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
Press and release this button to turn on the rear climate
turns off after 10 minutes.
controls (if equipped). The indicator will illuminate when
the rear climate controls are ON. Performing this function
CAUTION!
again will turn OFF the rear climate controls.
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to 8. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button for warmer temperature setwindow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth tings.
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after automatically exit Sync.
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive 9. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
window cleaners on the interior surface of the Provides the passenger with independent temperature
window.
control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)position. Blower control should be left in the “ON” position
Press the Sync soft-key to toggle the Sync feature On/Off.
to allow the climate control to either warm or cool the
The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is
vehicle.
enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger
temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Hard-key
Changing the passenger temperature setting while in The blower speed increases as you turn the control
Sync will automatically exit this feature.
clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the knob counter-clockwise.
11. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air Soft-key
forced through the climate system. There are seven Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
speeds can be selected using either hard-heys or soft-keys area between the icons.
as follows:
10. SYNC
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
4
376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
12. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are
as follows:
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up
and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to
shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these
outlets.
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and
floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister
outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
• Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
snowy conditions.
• Defrost Mode
Air comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. When the defrost mode is
selected, the blower level may will increase.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377
13. Climate Control OFF Button
16. Temperature Control
(Manual Temperature Control Only)
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
Press the temperature soft-key to regulate the temperaON/OFF.
ture of the air inside the passenger compartment. Moving
14. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
the temperature bar into the red area, indicates warmer
Provides the driver with independent temperature con- temperatures. Moving the temperature bar into the blue
trol. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
area indicates cooler temperatures.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically Climate Control Functions
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
A/C (Air Conditioning)
time.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
15. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
Provides the driver with independent temperature con- system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
trol. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
time.
sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
4
378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
prior settings. The soft-key illuminates when MAX A/C
• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
is ON.
Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but
the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
of the windows.
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the prior
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
settings and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
MAX A/C
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (lo- MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perforcated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of mance. Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from and the prior settings. The soft-key illuminates when
MAX A/C is ON.
the front of the radiator and through the condenser.
NOTE:
MAX A/C
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings.
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perforPressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C operamance.
tion to switch to the prior settings and the MAX A/C
indicator will turn off.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379
Recirculation Control
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the Recirculation control button. The
recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is
selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
ATC Hard-keys are located in the center of the instrument panel.
Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect威 Touch-screen.
Automatic Operation
1. Press the AUTO hard-key or soft-key button (9) on the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may 2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation feasystem to maintain by adjusting the driver and pasture may be unavailable (soft-key greyed out) if condisenger temperature hard or soft control buttons (8, 9,
tions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the
14, 15). Once the desired temperature is displayed, the
windshield. On systems with Manual Climate Controls,
system will achieve and automatically maintain that
the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to
comfort level.
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will be
disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempt- 3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experiing to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
LED in the control button to blink and then turn off.
system to function automatically.
4
380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
comfort as quickly as possible.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
feature. Refer to the “Uconnect威 System Settings” in
selected in Manual operation.
this section of the manual.
Operating Tips
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will suggested control settings for various weather condiincrease in speed and transition into Auto mode.
tions.
NOTE:
Manual Operation
Summer Operation
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed, The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation con- must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
trol.
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381
against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene
glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side winWinter Operation
dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed.
Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
is not recommended because it may cause window
rainy or humid weather.
fogging.
NOTE:
Vacation Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service • Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the • Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automatifresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
4
382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Outside Air Intake
A/C Air Filter
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instructions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383
Manual Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390 䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .395
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .397
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
▫ Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .395
▫ Five-Speed Automatic Transmission –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
䡵 AUTOSTICK威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
▫ Operation – Eight-Speed Transmission
(If Equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
5
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Operation – Five-Speed Transmission . . . . . . .415 䡵 ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
䡵 SPORT MODE (5.7L ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED . . .417 䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .428
䡵 ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED . .418
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .428
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .419
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .429
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .430
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
▫ Ready Alert Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
▫ Rain Brake Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY (IF EQUIPPED) —
5.7L ENGINE ONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
▫ Synchronizing ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .440
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .441
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .442
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . .447
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .450
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
▫ All Season Tires – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .450
▫ Summer Or Three Season Tires – If Equipped. .451
▫ Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped . . . . . . . . .452
▫ Full Size Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
▫ Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .453
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
䡵 TIRE CHAINS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .459
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .460
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
5
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Premium System – If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . .465 䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
▫ 3.6L Engine – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
▫ 5.7L Engine – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .471
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release. . . . . . . . .481
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . .483
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . .483
▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
▫ Two-Wheel Drive And All-Wheel Drive . . . . . .496
5
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING! (Continued)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
(Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
Automatic Transmission
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the Remote
Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go™ FOBIK is
in the passenger compartment.
Normal Starting
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
5
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, press the button again.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed once, the
EVIC (if equipped) will display a “Vehicle Not In
Park” message and the engine will remain running.
Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it
could roll.
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and release minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
OFF position.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions – With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
3. If the shift lever is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/
NEUTRAL Position)
STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle
speed must be below 5 mph (8 km/h) before the The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
engine will shut off. The ignition switch position will ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN
remain in the ACC position until the shift lever is in and START. To change the ignition switch positions
PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF without starting the vehicle and use the accessories
position. If the shift lever is not in PARK and the follow these steps.
STARTING AND OPERATING 393
1. Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position:
2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
change the ignition switch to the ACC position (EVIC
displays “ACC”),
3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to change the ignition switch to the RUN position
(EVIC displays “RUN”),
4. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time
to return the ignition switch to the OFF position (EVIC
displays “OFF”).
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
(Continued)
5
394 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button)
2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it.
3. Press and release the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10
seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release
the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
After Starting
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ proce- decrease as the engine warms up.
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
STARTING AND OPERATING 395
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that
is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power
Module.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
5
396 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and turn the engine OFF. When the ignition is in
the LOCK/OFF position, the shift lever is locked in
PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.
(Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 397
WARNING! (Continued)
• Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a
location accessible to children), and do not leave
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the
ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission – If
Equipped
Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art, fuel
efficient eight-speed transmission. The electronic shift
lever in this vehicle does not slide like a conventional
shifter. Instead, the shift lever is spring loaded and moves
forward and rearward, always returning to the center
position after each gear is selected.
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
before the engine can be turned off. This helps the driver
avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing
the transmission in PARK. This system also locks the shift
lever in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the OFF
The transmission gear (PRND) is displayed both on the
position.
shift lever and in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC).
5
398 STARTING AND OPERATING
To select a gear range, press the lock button on the shift
lever and move the lever rearward or forward. You must
also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of
PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section). To shift past multiple gear ranges at
once (such as PARK to DRIVE), move the lever past the
first (or second) detent. Select the DRIVE range for
normal driving.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers). Only shift from DRIVE to
PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your
foot on the brake pedal when moving the shift lever
between these gears.
Standard Shifter
The standard shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and LOW shift positions. Using the LOW
position manually downshifts the transmission to a
lower gear based on vehicle speed.
Shift Lever
STARTING AND OPERATING 399
To shift back into PARK from DRIVE, bring the vehicle to
a complete stop, fully press the brake pedal, press the
The optional shift lever (with AutoStick威 shift paddles
lock button on the shift lever, then push and hold the
mounted on the steering wheel) provides PARK, REshift lever fully forward until “P” is displayed in the
VERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and SPORT shift positions.
EVIC.
Once in the DRIVE range, tapping the shift lever rearward will toggle between SPORT mode and DRIVE Shifting From REVERSE To NEUTRAL
mode. You do not need to press the shift lever button
Pull the shift lever rearward to the first detent and
when toggling between DRIVE and SPORT modes.
release. “N” will display in the EVIC.
Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick威 shift
To shift back into REVERSE from NEUTRAL, firmly
control (refer to “AutoStick威” in this section). Pressing
press the brake pedal, press the lock button on the shift
the shift paddles (-/+) while in the DRIVE or SPORT
lever, then push the shift lever forward to the first detent
position will manually select the transmission gear, and
and release. “R” will display in the EVIC.
will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as
Shifting From NEUTRAL To DRIVE
8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
Optional Shifter With AutoStick威
Firmly press the brake pedal, press the lock button on the
shift lever, then pull the shift lever rearward and release.
Firmly press the brake pedal, press the lock button on the
“D” will display in the EVIC.
shift lever, then pull and hold the shift lever fully
rearward until “D” is displayed in the EVIC.
Shifting From PARK To DRIVE
5
400 STARTING AND OPERATING
To shift back into NEUTRAL from DRIVE, firmly press Shifting From DRIVE To SPORT/LOW
the brake pedal, press the lock button on the shift lever, Vehicles Equipped With SPORT Mode
then push the shift lever forward and release. “N” will
To shift from DRIVE to SPORT, pull the shift lever
display in the EVIC.
rearward until “S” is displayed in the EVIC.
Shifting From REVERSE To DRIVE
To shift back into DRIVE from SPORT, pull the shift lever
Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, firmly press the
rearward until “D” is displayed in the EVIC.
brake pedal, press the lock button on the shift lever, then
pull the shift lever rearward and release when “D” is Vehicles Equipped With LOW Mode
displayed in the EVIC.
To shift from DRIVE to LOW, pull the shift lever rearTo shift back into REVERSE from DRIVE, bring the ward until “L” is displayed in the EVIC.
vehicle to a complete stop, firmly press the brake pedal,
To shift back into DRIVE from LOW, pull the shift lever
press the lock button on the shift lever, then push the shift
rearward until “D” is displayed in the EVIC.
lever forward and release when “R” is displayed in the
Gear Ranges
EVIC.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
STARTING AND OPERATING 401
If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to cycle the
ignition to the LOCK/OFF position before restarting.
Transmission gear engagement may be delayed after
restarting the engine if the key is not cycled to the
LOCK/OFF position first.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
placing the shift lever in PARK. As an added precaution,
turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
WARNING!
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift
lever in PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.
(Continued)
PARK
5
402 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and turn the engine OFF. When the ignition is in
the OFF position, the shift lever is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 403
CAUTION!
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever
could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
The following indicators should be used to ensure that started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position: the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
• Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
it indicates the PARK position.
5
404 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
DRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick威 shift
control (if equipped) to select a lower gear. Under these
conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance
and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or
below), transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as
STARTING AND OPERATING 405
vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume once the result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all.
SPORT – If Equipped
Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the
This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission
schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are in- may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and
creased to make full use of available engine power. To restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
switch between DRIVE and SPORT modes, tap the shift illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will
lever rearward. SPORT mode is only accessible from inform the driver of the more serious conditions, and
DRIVE.
indicate what actions may be necessary.
LOW – If Equipped
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
Use this range for engine braking when descending very can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
steep grades. In this range, the transmission will down- following steps.
shift for increased engine braking. LOW mode is only NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message
accessible from DRIVE.
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after engine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired
Transmission Limp Home Mode
location (preferably, at your authorized dealer).
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could 1. Stop the vehicle.
5
406 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible.
3. Turn the engine OFF.
Five-Speed Automatic Transmission – If
Equipped
The shift lever position display (located in the instrument
cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You must
press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK
5. Restart the engine.
(refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no this section). To drive, move the shift lever from PARK or
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
operation.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom- precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
recur.
hundred miles (kilometers).
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
service is required.
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
moving the shift lever between these gears.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
STARTING AND OPERATING 407
The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual shifts can
be made using the “AutoStick威” shift control (refer to
“AutoStick威” in this section). Moving the shift lever to
the left or right (-/+) while in the DRIVE position, or
tapping one of the steering wheel-mounted shift paddles
(-/+) (if equipped), will manually select the transmission
gear, and will display that gear in the instrument cluster
as 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
5
Shift Lever
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to cycle the
ignition to the LOCK/OFF position before restarting.
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
Transmission gear engagement may be delayed after turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
restarting the engine if the key is not cycled to the grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
LOCK/OFF position first.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
WARNING!
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift
lever in PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.
(Continued)
PARK
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
placing the shift lever in PARK. As an added precaution,
STARTING AND OPERATING 409
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and turn the engine off. When the ignition is in the
OFF position, the shift lever is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever
could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
The following indicators should be used to ensure that started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position: the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
• Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
it indicates the PARK position.
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
DRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second,
and third gears, direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth
gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the “AutoStick威” shift
control (refer to “AutoStick威” in this section) to select a
lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear
will improve performance and extend transmission life
by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
5
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to
This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift
be driven to an authorized dealer for service without
schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are indamaging the transmission.
creased to make full use of available engine power. To
toggle between DRIVE and SPORT modes, touch the In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
SPORT button (on the Controls screen in the center touch can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
panel).
following steps:
SPORT - IF EQUIPPED
Transmission Limp Home Mode
1. Stop the vehicle.
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop.
After the vehicle has stopped, the transmission will
remain in second gear regardless of which forward gear
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the engine OFF.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
STARTING AND OPERATING 413
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
AUTOSTICK姞
AutoStick威 is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
of the vehicle. AutoStick威 allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer and improve overall vehicle performance.
service is required.
This system can also provide you with more control
during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions,
mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situaThe automatic transmission includes an electronically
tions.
controlled Overdrive (fifth gear). The transmission will
automatically shift into Overdrive if the following con- Operation – Eight-Speed Transmission
(If Equipped)
ditions are present:
Overdrive Operation
• the shift lever is in the DRIVE position,
• vehicle speed is sufficiently high, and
• the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
When the transmission is in DRIVE or SPORT mode, it
will operate automatically, shifting between the eight
available gears. To engage AutoStick威, simply tap one of
the steering wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-) while in
DRIVE or SPORT mode. Tapping (-) to enter AutoStick威
mode will downshift the transmission to the next lower
5
414 STARTING AND OPERATING
SPORT mode is exited or as described below. The
gear, while using (+) to enter AutoStick威 mode will retain
the current gear. When AutoStick威 is active, the current
transmission will not upshift automatically at redline
in this mode, nor will downshifts be obtained if the
transmission gear is displayed in the instrument cluster.
accelerator pedal is pressed to the floor.
In AutoStick威 mode, the transmission will only shift up
or down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver,
• In either DRIVE or SPORT mode, the transmission will
unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would
automatically downshift as the vehicle slows to a stop
result. It will remain in the selected gear until another
(to prevent engine lugging) and will display the curupshift or downshift is chosen, except as described
rent gear. Tapping the (+) paddle (at a stop) will allow
below.
starting in second gear. After a stop, the driver should
manually upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle
• If AutoStick威 is engaged while in DRIVE mode, the
accelerates.
transmission will automatically shift up when maximum engine speed is reached. If the accelerator is fully To disengage AutoStick威 mode, press and hold the (+)
pressed, the transmission will downshift when pos- shift paddle until “D” or “S” is once again displayed in
sible (based on current vehicle speed and gear). Lack the instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of the
of accelerator pedal activity will cause the transmis- AutoStick威 mode at any time without taking your foot off
sion to revert to automatic operation.
the accelerator pedal.
• If AutoStick威 is engaged while in SPORT mode,
manual gear selection will be maintained until either
STARTING AND OPERATING 415
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
Operation – Five-Speed Transmission
will shift up or down when (+/-) is manually selected by
the driver (using the shift lever, or the shift paddles [if
equipped]), unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would result. It will remain in the selected gear
until another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as
described below.
• If AutoStick威 is engaged while in DRIVE mode, the
transmission will automatically shift up when maximum engine speed is reached. On some models, the
transmission will downshift (when possible, based on
vehicle speed and gear) if the accelerator is fully
pressed.
When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, the
transmission will operate automatically, shifting between
the five available gears. To engage AutoStick威, simply tap
the shift lever to the right or left (+/-) while in the DRIVE
position, or tap one of the steering wheel-mounted shift
• If AutoStick威 is engaged while in SPORT mode,
paddles (+/-), if equipped. Tapping (-) to enter
manual gear selection will be maintained until either
AutoStick威 mode will downshift the transmission to the
SPORT mode is exited or as described below. The
next lower gear, while using (+) to enter AutoStick威
transmission will not upshift automatically at redline
mode will retain the current gear. When AutoStick威 is
in this mode, nor will downshifts be obtained if the
active, the current transmission gear is displayed in the
accelerator pedal is pressed to the floor.
instrument cluster. In AutoStick威 mode, the transmission
5
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the To disengage AutoStick威 mode, hold the shift lever to the
vehicle slows down (to prevent engine lugging) and right or press and hold the (+) shift paddle (if equipped)
until “D” is once again displayed in the instrument
will display the current gear.
cluster. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick威 mode at
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
any time without taking your foot off the accelerator
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
pedal.
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
• You can start out in first or second gear. Tapping (+) (at
a stop) will allow starting in second gear. Starting out
in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick威 is
engaged.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick威 is engaged.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
SPORT MODE (5.7L ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic controlled
dampening system. This system reduces body roll and
pitch in many driving situations including cornering,
acceleration and braking. There are three modes of operation:
• Automatic (Auto) Mode — This is the default position
when vehicle ignition is first turned on. This mode will
give a sporty, but comfortable ride. Within this mode,
the suspension will adapt to the vehicle inputs, including vehicle speed, steering inputs, braking and acceleration.
• Sport Mode — This mode is driver selectable when the
vehicle is placed in SPORT mode (press the CONTROLS button and then the SPORT button on the
display screen). This mode will set suspension for
maximum performance handling and is intended for
spirited driving.
NOTE: The SPORT setting will provide a firmer ride.
• When SPORT mode is enabled, a flag will light up in
the instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
Description” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
SPORT Mode
5
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
• AUTO mode will provide a sporty comfortable ride, To maximize fuel economy, your AWD vehicle automatiwhere as SPORT or TRACK will be a firmer, sportier cally defaults to rear-wheel drive (RWD) when road and
environmental conditions are such that wheel slip is
suspension with better handling.
unlikely to occur. When specific road and environmental
• Track Mode — This mode includes SPORT suspension
conditions require increased levels of road traction, the
and affects transmission shifting in either “Auto” or
vehicle automatically shifts into AWD mode. Automatic
“Manual” mode. Refer to “AutoStick” in “Starting
AWD operation could be activated by outside temperaAnd Operating” for further information. In TRACK
ture, wheel slip, or other predetermined conditions (there
mode, the transmission has a sportier, more aggressive
may be a slight delay for AWD engagement after a wheel
shift pattern. In Manual mode, the transmission will
slip condition occurs). AWD can also be manually sehold gear at redline during manual shifting (console
lected by moving the shift lever into the AutoStick威 mode
shifter or paddle shifters).
(+/-) or activating the windshield wipers for an extended
period of time. Drive mode, RWD or AWD, is displayed
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED
momentarily in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
This vehicle is equipped with an active on-demand (EVIC) in the gage area of the vehicle display when the
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system which makes available transmission is first shifted into gear, and if the drive
optimum traction for a wide variety of road surface and mode changes during vehicle operation.
driving conditions. The system minimizes wheel slip by
automatically redirecting torque to the front and rear
wheels as necessary.
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
NOTE: If the “SERVICE AWD SYSTEM” warning message appears after engine start up, or during driving, it
means that the AWD system is not functioning properly
and that service is required. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
size may cause failure of the front differential and/or
the transfer case.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the rear (driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
5
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
Traction
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed:
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
Shallow Standing Water
CAUTION! (Continued)
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
POWER STEERING
Your vehicle is equipped with an electro-hydraulic power
steering system that will give you good vehicle response
and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces.
The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts
while parking and good feel while driving. If the electrohydraulic power steering system experiences a fault that
prevents it from providing power steering assist, then the
system will provide mechanical steering capability.
CAUTION!
Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electrically driven pump to reduce or stop power steering
assistance in order to prevent damage to the system.
Normal operation will resume once the system is
allowed to cool.
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING SYSTEM” NOTE:
message and a flashing icon are displayed on
• Even if power steering assistance is no longer operathe EVIC screen, it indicates that the vehicle
tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
needs to be taken to the dealer for service. It is
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance. Refer
steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds
to “Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Underand during parking maneuvers.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” messervice.
sage and an icon are displayed on the EVIC screen, it
indicates that extreme steering maneuvers may have FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY (IF EQUIPPED) —
occurred, which caused an over temperature condition in 5.7L ENGINE ONLY
the power steering system. You will lose power steering
assistance momentarily until the over temperature con- This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
dition no longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe, off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
then pull over and let vehicle idle for a few moments and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
until the light turns off. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
Information (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
Panel” for further information.
functionality after a battery disconnect.
5
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.
Parking Brake
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
(Continued)
5
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps”
the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
wheel lock-up.
The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) prevents
the rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater
control of available braking forces applied to the rear
axle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you • A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
of the stop.
related motor noises. These noises are the system perThese are all normal characteristics of ABS.
forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is
working properly. This self check occurs each time the
WARNING!
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or • The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can incaused by improperly installed or high output
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
debris, or panic stops.
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capaYou also may experience the following when the brake
bility. Installation of such equipment should be
system goes into Anti-Lock:
performed by qualified professionals.
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a • Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
short time after the stop),
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves,
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
• Brake pedal pulsations, and
slow down or stop.
(Continued)
5
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that include Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake Assist
System (BAS), and the Electronic Stability Control (ESC).
All four of these systems work together to enhance
vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions.
Also, your vehicle may be equipped with Hill Start Assist
(HSA), Ready Alert Braking, and Rain Brake Support.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydrauAll vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and lic brake pressure. This prevents wheel lock-up to help
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
accurate signals for the computer.
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
WARNING!
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each
driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is
applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is
reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
This system complements the ABS by optimizing the
vehicle braking capability during emergency brake maneuvers. This system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application
and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This
can help reduce braking distances.
Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS
assistance. To receive the benefits of this system, you
must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the
stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
5
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESC
corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle
by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine
power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the
condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
The ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path
that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
does not match the intended path, the ESC applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
the condition of oversteer or understeer.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
The “ESC Off” switch is located on the switch bank in the
center of the instrument panel. To enter the “Partial Off”
The ESC system has two available operating modes:
mode, momentarily press the “ESC Off” switch and the
ESC On
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will illuThis is the normal operating mode for the ESC. When- minate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily press the
“ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
ever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this
mode. This mode should be used for most driving Indicator Light” will turn off.
conditions. The ESC should only be turned OFF for NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow,
sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the
Partial Off
“Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the “ESC
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a Off” switch. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”
more spirited driving experience is desired. It is also mode is overcome, turn the ESC on again by momenintended for driving in deep snow, sand, or gravel. This tarily pressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done
mode disables the TCS portion of the ESC and raises the while the vehicle is in motion.
threshold for ESC activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than what ESC normally allows.
ESC Operating Modes
5
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed
in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or
greater hill.
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when
the activation criteria have been met. The system will not
activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less than
8%), with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer,
when the system will not activate and slight rolling
may occur. This could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
Towing With HSA
HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade
when pulling a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the
brake pedal is released, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a
hill and this could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid
rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration,
manually activate the trailer brake prior to releasing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• HSA is not a parking brake. If you stop the vehicle
on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK
and using the parking brake, it will roll down the
hill and could cause a collision with another vehicle or object. Always remember to use the parking brake while parking on a hill, and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
HSA Off
If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done
using the Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Ready Alert Braking
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to
reach full braking during emergency braking situations.
It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. When the throttle is released very quickly,
Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake
pressure. This brake pressure will not be noticed by the
driver. The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow
a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes.
Rain Brake Support
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance
in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
on the front brake rotors. It only functions when the
windshield wipers are in the LO or HI mode, it does not
function in the intermittent mode. When Rain Brake
Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and
no driver interaction is required.
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON NOTE:
position. It should go out with the engine
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momenLight” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the • Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
diagnosed and corrected.
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lothat caused the ESC activation.
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
5
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Tire Markings
Synchronizing ESC
If the power supply is interrupted (battery
disconnected or discharged), the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” may
illuminate with the engine running. If this
should occur, turn the steering wheel completely to the
left and then to the right. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” should go out. However, if
the light remains on, have the ESC and BAS checked at
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
NOTE:
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa- • Temporary spare tires are spares designed for tempotion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure
compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Exdesign standards. Tires designed to this standard have
ample: T145/80D18 103M.
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
5
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T or S = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
— ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load— Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure— Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
5
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
5
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Tire Placard Location
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
Tire and Loading Information Placard
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
5
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuaxles must not be exceeded. For further information on
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the weight referenced here.
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750
= 650 lbs [295 kg]).
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo NOTE:
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
• The following table shows examples on how to calcusafely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
capacity calculated in Step 4.
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
manual to determine how this reduces the available
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
5
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
5
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredictable steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Economy
Tire Inflation Pressures
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
The tire pressure should be checked and adjusted as well
as inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage at
least once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge
to check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not outside temperature condition.
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla- build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
5
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
Radial Ply Tires
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
WARNING!
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Alloading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire combine them with other types of tires.
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
and cold tire inflation pressures.
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
All Season Tires – If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
handling of your vehicle.
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires – If Equipped
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
on ice. Summer tires will not contain the all season
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
sidewall. Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
tire inflation pressures.
your vehicle.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
Snow Tires
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states produring the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
5
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel – If Equipped
CAUTION!
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option
Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
tire rotation pattern.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equipcompact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
ment tire and wheel as a spare, a non-matching tempothe Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
vehicle. Temporary use spares are engineered to be used
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
only with your vehicle. Your vehicle may be equipped
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
with one of the following types of non-matching tempo80D18 103M.
rary use spares; compact, full size, or limited-use. Do not
install more than one non-matching temporary use spare T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
tire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip- Full Size Spare – If Equipped
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
5
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the Tire Spinning
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
first opportunity.
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopWARNING!
ping when you are stuck.
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side door opening. Replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
replaced.
Life Of Tire
Tread Wear Indicators
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and summer tires, typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance schedule is highly recommended.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
5
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the
Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety
Information section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
those of the original wheels.
Replacement Tires
It is recommended you contact your original equipment
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu- equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva- safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
5
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Install on Rear Tires Only.
• Due to limited clearance, the Security Chain Company
(SCC) Super Z6 low profile traction device or equivalent is recommended on P215/65R17, P225/60R18 or
P235/55R18 tires..
• For an All Wheel Drive vehicle, P235/55R19 tire with
the use of a traction device that meets the SAE type
“Class S” specification is recommended.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
5
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
Tire Rotation
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three
hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not
exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in
“Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM
Telltale Light to turn off. The system will automatically
update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM
Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
TPM Telltale Light will still be ON. In this situation, the
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.
5
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants
or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPM sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light.
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in equipped) has a TPM sensor. The matching full size spare
can be used in place of any of the four road tires. The
the tire.
TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare
Base System
when it is used in place of a road tire. Otherwise, a spare
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless with a pressure below the low-pressure limit will not
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to cause the TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each sound.
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module,
• Four TPM sensors, and
• TPM Telltale Light
The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster, a ⬙LOW TIRE⬙ message will be
displayed and a chime will sound when tire pressure is
low in one or more of the four active road tires. Should
this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the
inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate
each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard
pressure value. Once the system receives the updated tire
5
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
pressures, the system will automatically update and the 3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
TPM Telltale Light and ⬙LOW TIRE⬙ message will turn
off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
to receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
Vehicles With Full Size Spare
If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will 1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS.
The system fault will also sound a chime. If the ignition
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
system fault still exists. The TPM Telltale Light will turn
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will
off when the fault condition no longer exists. A system
sound and the TPM Telltale Light and ⬙LOW TIRE⬙
fault can occur due to any of the following:
message will turn ON.
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
(24 km/h) will turn off the TPM Telltale Light and
the TPM sensors.
⬙LOW TIRE⬙ message as long as no tire pressure is
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the
materials that may block radio wave signals.
four active road tires.
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
Vehicles With Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in
the compact spare tire.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM
Telltale Light will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure
is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the
four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime
will sound and the TPM Telltale Light and ⬙LOW
Premium System – If Equipped
TIRE⬙ message will turn ON.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
15 mph (24 km/h), the ⬙LOW TIRE⬙ message will turn monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
off and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
75 seconds and then remain on solid.
readings to the receiver module.
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
and to maintain the proper pressure.
5
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
The TPMS consists of the following components:
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
• Receiver module,
The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Elec- tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road
tires. In addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙LOW TIRE⬙
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and
message and a graphic showing the pressure values of
• TPM Telltale Light
each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing or
The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if changing color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be
equipped) has a TPM sensor. The full size spare can be displayed.
used in place of any of the four road tires. The TPMS will
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
only monitor the pressure in the full size spare tire when
and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those
it is used in place of a road tire. Otherwise, a spare with
flashing or in a different color in the EVIC graphic) to the
a pressure below the low-pressure limit will not cause the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure inflation
TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound.
value as shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update, the graphic display in the
EVIC will stop flashing or change color back to the
• Four TPM sensors,
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
original color, and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off. longer display, and a pressure value will display in place
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive following:
this information.
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
Service TPMS Warning
the TPM sensors.
If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. 2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
materials that may block radio wave signals.
EVIC will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes
wheel housings.
(- -) in place of the pressure value to indicate which
sensor is not being received.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the TPM Telltale Light will no longer The EVIC will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
flash, and the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is
detected. In this case, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
5
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
message is then followed with a graphic display with 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pres15 mph (24 km/h) the TPM Telltale Light will turn
OFF, and the pressure value displayed will be updated
sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors
and stop flashing or return to its original color as long
but they may not be located in the correct vehicle
as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning
position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as
the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is displayed.
limit in any of the four active road tires.
Vehicles With Full Size Spare
Vehicles With Compact Spare
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly 1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in
has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS.
the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warnlimit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will
ing limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the TPM
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON. In
addition, the EVIC will display a low pressure mesTelltale Light will remain ON and a chime will sound.
In addition, the graphic in the EVIC will still display a
sage and a graphic showing the low tire pressure
flashing pressure value or a pressure value in a
value flashing or in a different color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙
message will also be displayed.
different color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be
displayed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
15 mph (24 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will flash on
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
TPMS to receive this information.
addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and
General Information
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
sound, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for following conditions:
75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC
will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a • This device may not cause harmful interference.
minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) • This device must accept any interference received,
in place of the pressure value.
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the followthe TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the ing licenses:
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in
MRXC4W4MA4
the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of United States
dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the Canada
2546A-C4W4MA4
5
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufacturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance.
3.6L Engine – If Equipped
The use of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it
will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in
This engine is designed to meet all emis- these engines.
sions regulations and provide excellent
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
fuel economy and performance when usyour engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
ing high-quality unleaded “regular” gasohigh speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
line having an octane rating of 87. The use
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experiprovide any benefit over regular gasoline in these
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
engines.
before considering service for the vehicle.
5.7L Engine – If Equipped
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded gasoline having
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available.
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and driveability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
genates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates not be covered under warranty.
may be used in your vehicle.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
5
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 MMT In Gasoline
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
• operate in a lean mode
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
• poor engine performance
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
• poor cold start and cold drivability
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
E-85 perform the following:
the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to
look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT
• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the
• change the engine oil and oil filter
United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor• disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the nia reformulated gasoline.
engine controller memory
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
Materials Added To Fuel
CAUTION! (Continued)
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
(Continued)
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
5
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline-only powered vehicles.
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
5
E-85 Fuel Cap
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E-85.
E-85 Badge
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
15% unleaded gasoline.
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
• you do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when
refueling
• you drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
least 5 miles (8 km)
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability
during warm up.
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on NOTE:
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E-85 • Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
fuel, or any mixture of these two fuels.
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, you may experience
hard starting and rough idle following start up even if
For best results, a refueling pattern that avoids alternatthe above recommendations are followed, especially
ing between E-85 and unleaded gasoline is recomwhen the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
mended.
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
additive, such as MOPAR威 Injector Cleanup or
Techron may be used.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in MOPAR威 engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395
contains additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR威 or an
equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is
beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon
(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
5
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
Replacement Parts
ADDING FUEL
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are 1. Press the fuel filler door release switch (located in the
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
driver’s door map pocket).
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol compatible parts.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect driveability.
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
2. Open the fuel filler door.
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refueling.
NOTE: Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches
allowing the flapper door to open.
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
6. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
Fuel Filler Door
3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the
pipe seals the system.
5
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: A funnel is provided (located in the trunk in the
spare tire area) to open the flapper door to allow for
emergency refueling with a gas can.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
Fuel Funnel
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Remove the access cover (located on the left side inner
trim panel).
5
Access Cover
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Pull the release cable.
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to
the rear of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
Release Cable
VEHICLE LOADING
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on
• Type of Vehicle
the “Vehicle Certification Label.” This information
should be used for passenger and luggage loading as • Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
indicated.
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Overloading
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
front and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
it is not over the GVWR.
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
rear GAWR.
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
WARNING!
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
5
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
Loading
TRAILER TOWING
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
NOTE:
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
• Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed to the
rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR and Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
GAWRs.
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
• Refer to the “Tire Placard” for your vehicle’s proper This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
tire pressure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
further information.
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle CertificaThe GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or teminformation.
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
WARNING!
ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
supported by the scale.
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
Tongue Weight (TW)
and trailer when weighed in combination.
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg) hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less
allowance for the presence of a driver.
than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
5
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
Frontal Area
Weight-Distributing Hitch
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the A weight-distributing system works by applying levermaximum width of the front of a trailer.
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
Trailer Sway Control
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it proinstalled between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control
swaying motions while traveling.
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds and trailer configuration / loading to comply with Gross
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
they are commonly used to tow small- and mediumsized trailers.
STARTING AND OPERATING 487
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
IV - Extra Heavy
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Class
Class
Class
Class
Duty
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed
on your vehicle.
5
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission
3.6L Automatic
5.7L Automatic
Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Weight)
22 sq ft (2.04 sq m)
1,000 lbs (454 kg)
32 sq ft (2.97 sq m)
1,000 lbs (454 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Frontal Area
Max. Tongue Weight (See
Note)
100 lbs (45 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
it should never exceed the weight referenced on the “Tire
and Loading Information” placard. Refer to “Tire Safety
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer collisions.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
STARTING AND OPERATING 489
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended:
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
(Continued)
5
490 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and it will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning corners.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury collision.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
(Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 491
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ
the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
(Continued)
1. Max loading as defined on the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard.
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized. (This requirement may limit the ability to
always achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue
weight as a percentage of total trailer weight.)
Towing Requirements – Tires
– Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
5
492 STARTING AND OPERATING
– Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to • Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Opervacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
ating” for information on tire pressures and for proper
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
tire inflation procedures.
personal injury.
– Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures • An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
before trailer usage.
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
– Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
brake controller is not required.
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information on tread wear indicators and for the proper • Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
inspection procedure.
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
– When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information
on replacement tires and for the proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load
carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR
and GAWR limits.
STARTING AND OPERATING 493
CAUTION!
WARNING! (Continued)
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
collision.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights And Wiring
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
(Continued)
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and sevenpin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
5
494 STARTING AND OPERATING
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
Seven-Pin Connector
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
STARTING AND OPERATING 495
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45
minutes of continuous operation, then change the transBefore setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
mission fluid and filter as specified for “police, taxi, fleet,
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from
or frequent trailer towing.” Refer to the “Maintenance
heavy traffic.
Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
Automatic Transmission
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include an adaptive drive strategy • Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
to avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if • When using the speed control, if you experience speed
frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you can use
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
the AutoStick威 shift control (if equipped) to select a lower
you can get back to cruising speed.
gear.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
maximize fuel efficiency.
under heavy loading conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing exces- AutoStick威 – If Equipped
sive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also – When using the AutoStick威 shift control, select the
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
provide better engine braking.
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “4” if
Towing Tips
5
496 STARTING AND OPERATING
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “3” or Air Conditioning
“2” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
Turn off temporarily.
– To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as neces- RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to MOTORHOME, ETC.)
a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road Two-Wheel Drive And All-Wheel Drive
conditions allow.
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground,
Cooling System
or using a tow dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. The only
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over- acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind another vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels
heating, take the following actions:
OFF the ground.
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .498
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .498 䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .499 䡵 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE — 5 SPEED
TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . .500
䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
TRANSMISSION (3.6L Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
▫ Jacking And Changing A Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .519
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES. . . . . . . . . . . .509
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
6
498 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the
switch bank near the top center of the instrument panel. IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
speed.
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 499
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H,” turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
6
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
(Continued)
500 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access
cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access the jack
and spare tire.
NOTE: The spare tire must be removed in order to
access the jack.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 501
6
Opening The Access Panel
3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire.
Spare Tire Fastener
4. Remove the spare tire.
502 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Remove the fastener securing the jack.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
Jack Fastener
6. Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the
spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to the
left to loosen the lug wrench, and remove the wrench
from the jack assembly.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 503
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever into PARK.
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6.
Block the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite of the
jacking position. For example, if
changing the right front tire, block
the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking And Changing A Tire
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
6
504 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
Jack Warning Label
Jacking Locations
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 505
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center
cap covers the lug nuts, use the lug wrench to pry the
center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to
loosen, but not remove, the lug nuts on the wheel with
the flat tire. Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill
flange.
NOTE: If the vehicle is too low for jack placement, slide
the jack on its side and rotate it up into position.
6
Front Jacking Location
506 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and tire.
7. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire
and install the spare tire.
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 507
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
Spare” under “Tires—General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for additional warnings, cautions,
and information about the spare tire, its use, and
operation.
8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the lug
nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
WARNING!
Mounting Spare Tire
NOTE:
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
handle counterclockwise.
6
508 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
WARNING! (Continued)
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
•
Always
stow
the jack parts and the spare tire in the
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
places
provided.
Have the deflated (flat) tire reeach nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightpaired
or
replaced
immediately.
ness of each lug nut is 110 ft/lb. (150 N·m). If in doubt
about the correct tightness, have them checked with
Road Tire Installation
a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a
service station.
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire. Make sure the base 2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
of the jack faces the back of the vehicle before
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
tightening down the fastener.
lug nuts.
WARNING!
WARNING!
• A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 509
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until precautions.
each nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightness of each lug nut is 110 ft-lbs (150 N·m). If in doubt
CAUTION!
about the correct tightness, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
station.
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a alternator or electrical system may occur.
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
WARNING!
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
6
510 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk.
Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the
engine compartment for jump-starting.
NOTE: The remote battery posts are viewed by standing
on the right side of the vehicle looking over the fender.
Remote Battery Posts
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 511
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.
6
512 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
the reverse sequence:
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper 6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the disthe discharged battery.
charged battery.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 513
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery. If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
vehicle.
and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator. Use
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
you should have the battery and charging system inmaintain the rocking motion, without spinning the
spected at your authorized dealer.
wheels or racing the engine.
CAUTION!
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
6
514 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.Once the vehicle has been freed, press the ⬙ESC
Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE — 5 SPEED
TRANSMISSION
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 515
3. Remove the rubber liner from the storage tray (located 6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
next to the shifter on the center console).
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
8. Reinstall the rubber storage bin liner.
5. Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the access port
(in the left side of the storage bin), and push and hold MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED
TRANSMISSION (3.6L Engine)
the override release lever in.
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake, before activating the Manual Park
Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will
allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by
the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or
death for those in or around the vehicle.
Shift Lever Override
6
516 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
In order to push or tow the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead
battery), a Manual Park Release is available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
NOTE: To prevent the vehicle from rolling unintentionally, firmly apply the parking brake.
1. Remove the console storage bin to access the Manual
Park Release lever.
Console Storage Bin
2. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, fish the
tether strap up through the opening in the console
base.
3. Insert the screwdriver into the slot in the center of the
lever, and disengage the spring steel lever locking tab
by pushing it to the right.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 517
6
Locking Tab
4. While holding the locking tab in the disengaged
position, pull the tether strap to rotate the lever up and
rearward, until it locks in place in the vertical position.
The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be towed.
Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
Tether Strap
518 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Push the latch (at the base of the lever, on the rear side)
rearward (away from the lever) to unlatch the lever.
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward and
down, to its original position, until the locking tab
snaps into place to secure the lever.
3. Pull up gently on the tether strap to confirm that the
lever is locked in its stowed position.
4. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console.
Reinstall the console storage bin.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 519
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
NOTE: This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service.
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheel Lift
Flatbed
Wheels OFF the
Ground
NONE
Front
Rear
ALL
RWD MODELS
AWD MODELS
IF Transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max
speed
• 15 mi (24 km) max distance
(5-speed trans)
• 30 mi (48 km) max distance
(8-speed trans)
OK
BEST METHOD
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
6
Trans in NEUTRAL
BEST METHOD
520 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Damage to the fascia will occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to the front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission may result.
• The manufacturer does not recommend towing this
vehicle using a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may
occur.
If the vehicle’s key fob is unavailable or the battery is
discharged, see “Manual Park Release” or “Shift Lever
Override” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK Flatbed towing is recommended. DO NOT tow an AWD
vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground.
for towing.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 521
If the transmission is operable, vehicles WITHOUT AWD
may be towed (with rear wheels on the ground) under
the following conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km) Vehicles equipped with AWD can be towed with the
for 5-speed transmission, or 30 miles (48 km) for transmission in NEUTRAL and the rear wheels OFF the
8-speed transmission.
ground with no limitation on speed or distance.
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 15
miles (24 km) for 5-speed transmission, or 30 miles
(48 km) for 8-speed transmission, tow with the rear
wheels OFF the ground (on a flatbed, or with the rear
wheels raised using a wheel lift and the transmission in
NEUTRAL).
6
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .525
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . .526
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .527
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .530
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
7
524 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ All Wheel Drive (AWD) – If Equipped . . . . . .554
▫ Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
▫ Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
▫ Rear Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . .565
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
▫ Front Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam
Headlamp, Park/Turn Lamp, and Side Marker
Lamp — Models with Halogen Headlamps . . .572
▫ Front Low Beam Headlamp and Park/Turn Lamp
— Models with High Intensity Discharge
Headlamps (HID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
▫ Backup Lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND
GENUINE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 525
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
7
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
Engine Oil Dipstick
Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
Engine Coolant Reservoir
5
6
7
8
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Engine Oil Fill
— Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
— Washer Fluid Reservoir
526 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L
1
2
3
4
— Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
— Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
— Engine Coolant Reservoir
— Air Cleaner Filter
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Engine Oil Fill
Engine Oil Dipstick
Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
Washer Fluid Reservoir
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 527
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emissions control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
7
528 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on when 3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part
ready for testing.
of a normal bulb check.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II 4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
happen:
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
not proceed to the I/M station.
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
do the following:
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
crank or start the engine.
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
this test over.
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 529
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is available which include detailed service information for
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced attempting any procedure yourself.
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
running.
penalties being assessed against you.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
7
530 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
CAUTION! (Continued)
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 531
Checking Oil Level – 5.7L Engine
Engine Oil
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
fully warmed engine is shut off.
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
oil when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE” range
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
will result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE” range
dipstick. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of oil when the reading is
on these engines.
at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
engines.
Checking Oil Level – 3.6L Engine
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
7
532 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Change Engine Oil
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is Identification Symbol
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
This symbol means that the oil has
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informabeen certified by the American
tion.
Petroleum Institute (API). The
NOTE:Under no circumstances should oil change intermanufacturer only recommends
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
API Certified engine oils.
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 533
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
operation of the Fuel Saver Technology. Refer to “Fuel
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
Saver Technology – If Equipped” in “Starting and Operstarting and vehicle fuel economy.
ating” for further information.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certifiengine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Comshould not be used.
partment” illustration in this section.
Synthetic Engine Oils
Engine Oil Viscosity – 5.7L Engine
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recomtemperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
are followed.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
Materials Added To Engine Oil
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart- The manufacturer strongly recommends against the adment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa- dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
tion.
Engine Oil Viscosity – 3.6L Engine
7
534 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
performance may be impaired by supplemental addi- quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are a high quality oil
tives.
filter and are recommended.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and Engine Air Cleaner Filter
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the maintenance intervals.
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
WARNING!
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
your area.
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
Engine Oil Filter
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
at every engine oil change.
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
Engine Oil Filter Selection
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil serious personal injury.
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 535
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
NOTE:The battery is stored under an access cover in the
trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the
engine compartment for jump starting. Refer to “JumpStarting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
Battery Location
7
536 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 537
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
7
538 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor
oil, and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood,
behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger
side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When
installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation.
1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing
the retaining clips.
Access Door
2. Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access cover.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 539
Filter Access Cover
3. Remove the used filter.
A/C Air Filter
5. Close the filter access cover.
4. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the maintenance intervals.
vehicle (text and arrows on the filter will indicate this).
7
540 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Body Lubrication
Windshield Wiper Blades
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR威 Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should
be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies dependThe external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small performance of blades may be present with chattering,
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR威 marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder. are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 541
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual water.
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if
equipped).
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper
Exhaust System
blades clean. This will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This system.
rating information can be found on most washer fluid If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
containers.
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 L) of washer or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid” appears in
7
542 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING! (Continued)
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
(Continued)
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 543
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is impor- • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
tant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper
catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage. • Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
against you.
7
544 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front
of the radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc.
If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden
hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antiCoolant Checks
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 545
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze) solution.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, it should be replaced with
the specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as
possible.
(Continued)
7
546 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
period, it is important that you use the same engine
coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze).
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology).
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34° F (−37° C) are
anticipated.
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionintervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
to ten years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replace(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
ment. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 547
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not
recommended and can result in cooling system damage.
Drain, flush, and refill as soon as possible to avoid
damage if coolant types are mixed in an emergency.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes
pressure to build up in the cooling system. To
prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
7
548 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing cool- • Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
ant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the
engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant
bottle need only be checked once a month.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 549
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antioperation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
expansion bottle must also be protected against
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased
freezing.
emissions.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested Brake System
for leaks.
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at system components should be inspected periodically.
50% OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum) and Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your maintenance intervals.
engine which contains aluminum components.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
7
550 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
Master Cylinder – Brake Fluid Level Check
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately leak and a checkup may be needed.
if the brake system warning light indicates system fail- Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Reure.
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “MainCheck the fluid level in the master cylinder when per- taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
forming underhood services.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 551
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
(Continued)
7
552 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
correct level using the recommended fluid. No chemical
flushes should be used in any transmission; only the
approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and
filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and
Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for
fluid specifications.
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
Special Additives
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s recommended transmission The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in any special additives in the transmission.
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fluid specifications. It is
important to maintain the transmission fluid at the
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 553
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
transmission filler tube is capped and no dipstick is
provided. Your authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using special service dipstick.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the
transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle
with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
• If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission
damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the
proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not Fluid And Filter Changes
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
maintenance intervals.
7
554 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the transmission Fluid Changes
is disassembled for any reason.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) – If Equipped
The all wheel drive system consists of a transfer case and Rear Axle
front differential. The exterior surface of these compoFor normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
nents should be inspected for evidence of fluid leaks. required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
Confirmed leaks should be repaired as soon as possible.
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
The transfer case fluid fill/inspection plug is located in inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
the middle of the rear housing. To inspect the transfer fluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
case fluid level, remove the fill/inspection plug. The Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informafluid level should be even with the bottom of the hole. tion.
Use this plug to add fluid as required.
Fluid Level Check
The front differential fill plug is located on the outer
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the
cover near the halfshaft attachment. To inspect the differaxle. The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill
ential fluid level, remove the fill plug. The fluid level
hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
should be even with or slightly below the bottom of the
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
hole.
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 555
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
resistance built into your vehicle.
maintenance intervals.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion What Causes Corrosion?
Change Axle Fluid
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
7
556 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274
kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and
decals.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威 Special Care
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 557
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
considered the responsibility of the owner.
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner.
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
7
558 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Equipped
Interior Care
Use MOPAR威 Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man- carpeting.
ner:
Use MOPAR威 Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
MOPAR威 Total Clean is specifically recommended for
with a clean, dry towel.
leather upholstery.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean, or a cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose
and MOPAR威 Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
protectants on Stain Repel products.
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 559
WARNING!
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
Cleaning Headlights
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may
lights (if equipped) that are lighter and less susceptible to scratch the elements.
stone breakage than glass headlights.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
directly on the mirror.
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution folmolded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
lowed by rinsing.
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
7
560 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive buckles do not work properly.
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders
rag.
Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
with the cupholder in the center console.
Seat Belt Maintenance
NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed.
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR威 Total Clean, a
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft
cloth.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 561
FUSES
CAUTION!
Integrated Power Module
The Integrated Power Module is located in the engine
compartment. This module contains fuses and relays.
Integrated Power Module
• When installing the integrated power module
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the integrated power module and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
7
562 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Cartridge
Fuse
—
40 Amp
Green
50 Amp
Red
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
25 Amp
Natural
—
—
MiniFuse
Description
Cavity
—
—
Fuse – Spare
Radiator Fan #1
9
Cartridge
Fuse
—
—
Power Steering #1
10
—
—
Starter
11
—
—
Anti-Lock Brakes
12
—
—
Anti-Lock Brakes
—
—
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
13
14
15
—
—
—
16
—
MiniFuse
Description
20 Amp
Yellow
All-Wheel Drive
Module – If
Equipped
Security
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
—
—
25 Amp
Natural
—
Horns
Air Conditioning
Clutch
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Transmission
Fuse – Spare
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 563
Cavity
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
28
Cartridge
Fuse
50 Amp
Red
50 Amp
Red
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
—
—
—
—
MiniFuse
Description
Cavity
—
Radiator Fan #2
29
Cartridge
Fuse
—
—
Power Steering #2
30
31
—
—
—
Wiper Motor
—
Headlamp Washers
—
—
—
25 Amp
Natural
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuel Pump
32
33
34
—
—
—
35
—
36
—
MiniFuse
Description
15 Amp
Blue
—
25 Amp
Natural
—
—
25 Amp
Natural
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
Transmission
Shifter
Fuse – Spare
Engine Module
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Powertrain #1
Powertrain #2
Anti-Lock Brake
Module
7
564 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
37
Cartridge
Fuse
—
38
—
39
—
48
—
MiniFuse
Description
Cavity
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
Engine Controller/
Rad Fan Relays
Airbag Module
49
50
51
Cartridge
Fuse
—
—
—
Power Steering
Module/AC Clutch
Relay
AWD Module/
Front Axle Disconnect
52
53
—
—
10 Amp
Red
MiniFuse
Description
—
—
20 Amp
Yellow
—
—
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Vacuum Pump
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 565
Rear Power Distribution Center
There is also a power distribution center located in the
trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center
contains fuses and relays.
Rear Power Distribution Center
7
Opening The Access Cover
566 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Cavity
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Cartridge
Fuse
60 Amp
Yellow
—
60 Amp
Yellow
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
MiniFuse
Description
—
Front PDC Feed #1
—
—
Fuse – Spare
Front PDC Feed #2
—
Sunroof
—
Exterior Lighting #1
—
Exterior Lighting #2
—
Interior Lighting/
Washer Pump
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 567
Cavity
9
10
11
12
15
16
17
18
Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
—
40 Amp
Green
—
—
—
MiniFuse
Description
—
Power Locks
—
Driver Door
—
Passenger Door
20 Amp
Yellow
—
Cigar Lighters, Instrument Panel & Power
Outlet Console Rear
HVAC Blower
—
—
—
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
19
20
21
22
23
Cartridge
Fuse
—
—
—
—
—
24
—
25
—
26
27
—
—
Cavity
MiniFuse
—
—
—
—
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
10 Amp
Red
—
25 Amp
Natural
Description
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
Fuel Door/Diagnostic
Port
Radio Screen
Tire Pressure Monitor
Fuse — Spare
Amplifier
7
568 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
31
Cartridge
Fuse
—
32
—
33
—
34
—
35
—
36
37
—
—
Cavity
MiniFuse
25 Amp
Natural
15 Amp
Blue
15 Amp
Blue
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
—
15 Amp
Blue
Description
Cavity
Power Seats
38
HVAC Module/Cluster
40
41
42
Ignition Switch/
Wireless Module
Steering Column
Module/Clock
Battery Sensor
Fuse — Spare
Radio
Cartridge
Fuse
—
43
—
—
30 Amp
Pink
—
44
—
45
—
46
—
MiniFuse
Description
20 Amp
Yellow
—
—
—
Power Outlet Inside
Arm Rest
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
Rear Defrost
25 Amp
Natural
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
10 Amp
Red
Rear Heated Seats/
Steering Wheel
Park Assist/Blind
Spot/Camera
Cluster/Rearview
Mirror/Compass
Adaptive Cruise Control
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 569
47
Cartridge
Fuse
—
48
—
49
50
51
—
—
—
52
—
53
—
54
—
Cavity
MiniFuse
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
—
—
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
—
Description
Adaptive Front Lighting
Active Suspension
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
Front Heated Seats
Heated Cupholders/
Rear Heated Seat
Switches
HVAC Module/In Car
Temperature Sensor
Fuse — Spare
55
56
57
58
Cartridge
Fuse
—
—
—
—
59
60
61
62
63
64
—
—
—
—
—
—
Cavity
MiniFuse
—
—
—
10 Amp
Red
—
—
—
—
—
25 Amp
Natural
Description
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
Airbag Module
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
Rear Windows
7
570 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
65
Cartridge
Fuse
—
66
67
—
—
68
—
69
70
—
—
Cavity
VEHICLE STORAGE
MiniFuse
10 Amp
Red
—
15 Amp
Blue
15 Amp
Blue
—
—
Description
Airbag Module
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days, you may want to take these steps to protect your
battery.
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
Fuse — Spare
Run Sense
Illumination/Rear Sunshade
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 571
Interior Bulbs
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
W5W
Rear Courtesy/Reading
Lamps
Rear Compartment
562
(Trunk) Lamp
Overhead Console Read578
ing Lamp
Visor Vanity Lamps
A6220
Glove Box Lamp – If
194
Equipped
Door Courtesy
562
Shift Indicator Lamp
JKLE14140
Optional Door Map
LED (Serviced at AuthoPocket/Cup Holder
rized Dealer)
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for
replacement instructions.
Low Beam Headlamp
(Standard Halogen)
Low Beam Headlamp –
High Intensity Discharge
(HID)
High Beam Headlamp
Front Park/Turn Lamp
Front Fog Lamp – If
Equipped
Front Side Marker
Rear Tail Lamp
Rear Stop/Turn Lamp
Rear Side Marker
Bulb Number
H11
D3S (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
9005
3157A
PSX24W
168
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
168
7
572 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Backup Lamp
Center High-Mount Stop
Lamp (CHMSL)
License
Bulb Number
3157
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
168
BULB REPLACEMENT
Front Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam
Headlamp, Park/Turn Lamp, and Side Marker
Lamp — Models with Halogen Headlamps
1. Open the hood.
2. Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly counterclockwise, and then pull it out of the headlamp
assembly.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be 4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the headlamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp
assembly on the driver side of the vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 573
Front Low Beam Headlamp and Park/Turn Lamp
— Models with High Intensity Discharge
Headlamps (HID)
HID Headlamps
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlight switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to
the lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after
an authorized dealer for service.
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
7
574 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Backup Lamps
5. Reinstall new bulb.
1. Open trunk.
6. Install cover and fastener.
2. Remove fastener from cover.
License Lamp
1. Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear
fascia.
2. Remove the bulb and socket assembly.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
3. Remove cover.
4. Twist the bulb one quarter turn to remove.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 575
4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly.
5. Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia, and then install
the screws.
1 — License Lamp Bulb
2 — Socket
7
576 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
All Engines
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
5.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
Cooling System *
3.6 Liter Engine – We recommend you use MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent.
5.7 Liter Engine without Severe Duty II Cooling System – We recommend
you use MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula
or equivalent.
5.7 Liter Engine with Severe Duty II Cooling System – We recommend you
use MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or
equivalent.
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
U.S.
Metric
19 Gallons
72 Liters
6 Quarts
7 Quarts
5.6 Liters
6.6 Liters
10 Quarts
9.5 Liters
14.5 Quarts
13.9 Liters
15 Quarts
14.3 Liters
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 577
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs – 3.6L Engine
Spark Plugs – 5.7L Engine
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to the engine oil
fill cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to the engine oil
fill cap for correct SAE grade.
MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
We recommend you use MOPAR威 Spark Plugs.
We recommend you use MOPAR威 Spark Plugs.
87 Octane
87 Octane Acceptable – 89 Octane Recommended
7
578 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission – 8-Speed
Transmission
Automatic Transmission – 5-Speed
Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Front Axle
Rear Axle
Transfer Case
Fluid, Lubricant, Or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Shell L12108 Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR威 DOT 3 and SAE J1703. If DOT 3 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use MOPAR威 Hydraulic Fluid or equivalent meeting
MS-11655, such as Fuchs EG ZH 3044 or Pentosin CHF 11s.
We recommend you use API GL-5 SAE 75W90 Synthetic Gear Lubricant.
We recommend you use API GL-5 SAE 75W140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant.
We recommend you use MOPAR威 Transfer Case Lubricant for BorgWarner
44–40.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
▫ Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
580 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be disYour vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Re- than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
quired” message is displayed. Severe Operating Condi- referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
tions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or under “Invehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 strument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odommiles (805 km).
eter” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 581 M
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
whichever comes first.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, power steering and transmission as
needed
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
Required Maintenance Intervals.
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
page for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required
• Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped
with dipstick
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses
• Inspect exhaust system
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
8
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, boot
seals, and replace if necessary.
Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front
axle fluid (All Wheel Drive Only).
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake
function.
Inspect transfer case fluid (All Wheel Drive
Only).
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
2
32,000
M 582 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I Maintenance Chart
N
Mileage or time passed (whichever
T
comes first)
E
N
A
Or Years:
N
Or
Kilometers:
C
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the transfer case fluid. Change the
transfer case fluid; if using your vehicle for
any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, offroad, or frequent trailer towing. (All Wheel
Drive Only).
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter.
Replace cabin/air conditioning filter.
Replace spark plugs (3.6L engine).**
Replace spark plugs (5.7L engine).**
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever
comes first)
32,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 583 M
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10
years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first.
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing (five-speed only).
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter (five-speed only).
Change transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi,
fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing (All
Wheel Drive Only).
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
M 584 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
Mileage or time passed (whichever
N
comes first)
T
E
N
Or Years:
A
Or
Kilometers:
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
Change the rear axle fluid and on models
equipped with All Wheel Drive (AWD)
change the front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi,
fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever
comes first)
32,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 585 M
X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 586 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
WARNING!
N
T
E • You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
N
A
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
N
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
C
service job, take your vehicle to a competent meE
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .589
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .589 䡵 MOPAR威 PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .593
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .590
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .590
▫ In Mexico contact: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .594
9
588 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 589
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealer, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
9
590 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
Phone: (800) 423–6343
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621
center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenPhone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 591
Mexico, D. F.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Service Contract
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
9
592 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 593
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
dealer, and the manufacturer.
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
operating at its best.
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could http://www.safercar.gov.
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety In Canada
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
manufacturer.
should contact the Customer Service Department immeIf NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in defect to the Canadian government should contact Transa group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
MOPAR姞 PARTS
9
594 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshootNOTE: A street address is required when ordering
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the inforThese Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
mation that students and professional technicians need in
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acdiagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintainquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles.
ing, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC veIncluded are starting, operating, emergency and maintehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightforward nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
and safety tips.
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 595
Call toll free at:
Treadwear
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
9
596 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
598 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .244
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Airbag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .534
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
All Wheel Drive (AWD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .18
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . .18
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
INDEX 599
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Automatic Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .379
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode . . . . . . .405
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .24
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
10
600 INDEX
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .317
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Computer, Trip/Travel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . .366
Conserving Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .547
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
INDEX 601
Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy. . . . . .334
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . .
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . .
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze)
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise Control (Speed Control). . . .
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.576
.544
.547
.545
.548
.548
.547
.547
.545
.555
.244
.299
.589
10
602 INDEX
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474 Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .527
Electric Rear Window Defrost. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . .240
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . . .277
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
INDEX 603
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Exhaust Gas Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Filler Location Fuel . . . .
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . .
Air Conditioning . . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil Disposal .
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . .
Turn Signal . . . . . . .
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . .
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range . . . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . . .
Fuel Requirements . .
Maintenance . . . . . .
Replacement Parts . .
Starting . . . . . . . . . .
Flooded Engine Starting
Floor Console . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.534
.382
.534
.534
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.477
.477
.474
.478
.478
.477
.393
.302
10
604 INDEX
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Level Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . .
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . .
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.578
.576
.101
.554
.553
.550
.544
.531
.554
.577
.224
.211
.266
.513
.470
.473
.471
.334
.471
Filler Door (Gas Cap)
Gasoline . . . . . . . . .
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . .
Light . . . . . . . . . . .
Materials Added . . .
Methanol . . . . . . . .
Octane Rating . . . . .
Requirements . . . . .
Saver Mode . . . . . . .
Specifications . . . . . .
Tank Capacity . . . . .
Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . .
Fuel Optimizer . . . . . . .
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.318
.470
.318
.329
.473
.471
.470
.470
.334
.577
.576
.474
.334
.334
.561
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
INDEX 605
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gauges
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . .
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 Headlight Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or
Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420 Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch .
Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.573
.221
.559
.222
.226
.223
.221
.226
.220
.222
.541
.541
.209
.209
.114
.202
.395
.226
.432
10
606 INDEX
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Holder, Coin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Ignition
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561 Kicker Sound System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558 Knee Bolster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .230 Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
INDEX 607
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Latch Plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . .435
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . .317
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . .230
10
608 INDEX
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .317
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . .314
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Load Leveling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine).
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . .
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.535
.530
.580
.317
.594
.550
.213
.213
.213
.471
.335
INDEX 609
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Navigation System (Uconnect威 gps) . . . . . . . . . . . .277
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Mode
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
10
610 INDEX
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534 Power
Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . .294
Overdrive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . .235
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Park Sense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268 Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Pedals, Adjustable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Pets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Pets, Transporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .443
INDEX 611
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .547
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
Rear Park Sense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .368
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Remote Trunk Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
10
612 INDEX
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . .53
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
INDEX 613
Service Engine Soon Light
(Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Side View Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Sound System
Kicker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Steering
Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
10
614 INDEX
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .368 Tire and Loading Information Placard .
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .59
General Information . . . . . . . . . . .
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .379
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) .
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . .
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.442
.436
.100
.455
.447
.457
.499
.452
.447
.450
.448
.499
.455
.442
.460
.316
.595
.450
.456
INDEX 615
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . .
Tread Wear Indicators . . .
Tire Safety Information . . . . .
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . .
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational . . . . . . . . . .
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System Tips . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.459
.436
.438
.451
.500
.454
.491
.455
.436
.488
.484
.519
.488
.496
.488
.419
.429
.484
.496
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .24
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .21
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .21
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
10
616 INDEX
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .366
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .314
Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
INDEX 617
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
10
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel.
The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly to
the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof
or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in
mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect
the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so
equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Challenger
Chrysler Group LLC
13D481-126-AC
3rd Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Download PDF